UDA2182
Universal Dual Analyzer
Product Manual
70-82-25-119
January 2009
Honeywell Process Solutions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Document
Abstract
This document provides descriptions and procedures for the Installation, Configuration, Operation, and Troubleshooting of
your UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer.
Contacts
World Wide Web
The following lists Honeywell’s World Wide Web sites that will be of interest to our customers.
Honeywell Organization
WWW Address (URL)
http://www.honeywell.com
Corporate
Honeywell Field Solutions
Technical tips
http://www.honeywell.com/ps
http://content.honeywell.com/ipc/faq
Telephone
Contact us by telephone at the numbers listed below.
Organization
Phone Number
United States and Canada
Honeywell
1-800-423-9883 Tech. Support
1-800-525-7439 Service
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symbol Definitions
The following table lists those symbols used in this document to denote certain conditions.
Symbol
Definition
This CAUTION symbol on the equipment refers you to the Product Manual for
additional information. This symbol appears next to required information in the manual.
WARNING
PERSONAL INJURY: Risk of electrical shock. This symbol warns you of a potential
shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42.4 Vpeak,
or 60 VDC may be accessible. Failure to comply with these instructions could result in
death or serious injury.
ATTENTION, Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) hazards. Observe precautions for
handling electrostatic sensitive devices
Protective Earth (PE) terminal. Provided for connection of the protective earth (green
or green/yellow) supply system conductor.
Functional earth terminal. Used for non-safety purposes such as noise immunity
improvement. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to protective earth at the source
of supply in accordance with national local electrical code requirements.
Earth Ground. Functional earth connection. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to
Protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical
code requirements.
Chassis Ground. Identifies a connection to the chassis or frame of the equipment shall
be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and
local electrical code requirements.
iv
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
1
2
3
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................1
1.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................1
1.2 Features...........................................................................................................................................3
SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................................................5
2.1 Specifications..................................................................................................................................5
2.2 CE Conformity (Europe).................................................................................................................7
UNPACKING, PREPARATION, AND MOUNTING ...............................................9
3.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................9
3.2 Unpacking and Preparing..............................................................................................................10
3.3 Mounting.......................................................................................................................................10
4
5
POWER WIRING.................................................................................................15
4.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................15
4.2 General Wiring Practices ..............................................................................................................16
4.3 Power Wiring Considerations.......................................................................................................17
4.4 Installing Power Wiring................................................................................................................17
OPERATING THE ANALYZER...........................................................................20
5.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................20
5.2 Analyzer Overview .......................................................................................................................21
5.3 Key Navigation.............................................................................................................................22
5.4 Displays Overview........................................................................................................................23
5.5 Input Displays...............................................................................................................................25
5.6 PID Displays.................................................................................................................................26
5.7 Auto Cycle Displays .....................................................................................................................28
5.7.1 Overview............................................................................................................................28
5.7.2 Access to Auto Cycle Displays..........................................................................................28
5.7.3 How it works......................................................................................................................29
5.7.4 Displays..............................................................................................................................29
5.7.5 Hold Active........................................................................................................................30
5.7.6 Probe Transit......................................................................................................................30
5.7.7 Cycle Start Src ...................................................................................................................30
5.7.8 Cycle Interval.....................................................................................................................30
5.7.9 Rinse Cycle Cnt .................................................................................................................30
5.7.10
5.7.11
Rinse Mins......................................................................................................................30
Resume Dly Mins...........................................................................................................30
3/08
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.7.12
5.7.13
5.7.14
Manual Starting/Stopping the Auto Cycle .....................................................................31
Auto Cycle Fail ..............................................................................................................32
Conditional Sequencer Steps..........................................................................................32
5.8 Pharma Display.............................................................................................................................33
5.8.1 Overview............................................................................................................................33
5.8.2 How it works......................................................................................................................33
5.8.3 Access to Pharma Display..................................................................................................34
5.8.4 Displays..............................................................................................................................34
5.8.5 Pharma Warning and Fail Signal .......................................................................................36
5.9 Cation Calc Display ......................................................................................................................37
5.9.1 Overview............................................................................................................................37
5.9.2 How it works......................................................................................................................37
5.9.3 pH Calculation from Specific and Cation Conductivity Setup ..........................................38
5.9.4 Calibration..........................................................................................................................39
5.9.5 CO2 by Degassed Conductivity..........................................................................................39
5.9.6 Access to Cation Display ...................................................................................................39
5.9.7 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................40
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
Status Display............................................................................................................................41
Event History.............................................................................................................................46
Process Instrument Explorer Software ......................................................................................48
Modbus Communications..........................................................................................................50
6
CONFIGURATION...............................................................................................51
6.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................51
6.2 UDA2182 Block Diagram ............................................................................................................52
6.3 Main Setup Menu..........................................................................................................................53
6.4 Basic Configuration Procedure.....................................................................................................55
6.4.1 General Rules for Editing...................................................................................................55
6.5 Analog and Digital Signal Sources...............................................................................................58
6.6 Inputs Configuration.....................................................................................................................63
6.7 Outputs Configuration ..................................................................................................................74
6.8 Relays Configuration ....................................................................................................................76
6.9 Alarms Configuration ...................................................................................................................81
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14
6.15
Monitors Configuration.............................................................................................................83
Math Configuration...................................................................................................................85
Logic Configuration ..................................................................................................................87
Auxiliary Configuration ............................................................................................................89
PID Control Configuration........................................................................................................92
Auto Cycling Configuration....................................................................................................100
6.15.1
Overview ......................................................................................................................100
Accessing Auto Cycle Menu........................................................................................100
Auto Cycling Configuration.........................................................................................101
pH Auto Cycling Configuration Example....................................................................103
6.15.2
6.15.3
6.15.4
vi
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.16
6.17
6.18
Variables Configuration ..........................................................................................................105
Communication Configuration................................................................................................106
Maintenance Configuration.....................................................................................................108
7
INPUTS AND OUTPUTS WIRING.....................................................................114
7.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................114
7.2 General Wiring Practices ............................................................................................................115
7.3 Inputs and Outputs......................................................................................................................117
7.4 Direct pH/ORP Input Wiring Diagrams......................................................................................120
7.5 pH Input from External Preamplifier/Cap Adapter Wiring Diagrams........................................126
7.6 Conductivity................................................................................................................................130
7.7 Dissolved Oxygen.......................................................................................................................131
7.8 Communications Card.................................................................................................................133
7.9 Outputs........................................................................................................................................134
7.10
Option Card.............................................................................................................................135
8
INPUT CALIBRATION.......................................................................................136
8.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................136
8.2 Calibration Menu ........................................................................................................................137
8.3 pH/ORP and Conductivity Overview .........................................................................................138
8.4 Recommendations for Successful Measurement and Calibration...............................................139
8.5 pH Calibration.............................................................................................................................140
8.5.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................140
8.5.2 Calibrating pH Electrodes Using Automatic Buffer recognition .....................................141
8.5.3 Buffering Method of Calibrating pH Electrodes..............................................................145
8.5.4 Sample Method of Calibrating pH Electrodes .................................................................148
8.5.5 Viewing and resetting pH Offset and (Standardization) pH Slope ..................................150
8.6 ORP Calibration..........................................................................................................................151
8.6.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................151
8.6.2 ORP Calibration Using Reference Solution.....................................................................151
8.6.3 ORP Calibration Using Voltage Input .............................................................................154
8.6.4 Viewing and Resetting ORP Offset .................................................................................156
8.7 Conductivity Calibration.............................................................................................................157
8.7.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................157
8.7.2 Entering the Cal Factor for each cell................................................................................157
8.7.3 Determining and Entering the TDS Conversion Factor...................................................157
8.7.4 Determining TDS conversion factor ................................................................................158
8.7.5 Performing Calibration Trim............................................................................................159
8.7.6 Resetting Calibration Trim...............................................................................................162
8.7.7 Cation pH Calibration ......................................................................................................163
8.7.8 Resetting pH Offset..........................................................................................................165
8.8 Dissolved Oxygen Calibration....................................................................................................166
3/08
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
OUTPUTS CALIBRATION ................................................................................178
9.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................178
9.2 Output Calibration ......................................................................................................................179
10
11
12
TEMPERATURE INPUT CALIBRATION ..........................................................185
10.1
10.2
Overview .................................................................................................................................185
Temperature Input Calibration ................................................................................................186
CALIBRATION HISTORY .................................................................................189
Overview .................................................................................................................................189
Clear Calibration History ........................................................................................................190
11.1
11.2
DIAGNOSTICS AND MESSAGES....................................................................191
Overview .................................................................................................................................191
System Status Messages..........................................................................................................192
Calibration Diagnostics...........................................................................................................193
Auto Cycle Fail Messages.......................................................................................................194
Pharma Fail Messages.............................................................................................................195
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
13
14
ETHERNET AND COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................196
13.1
Overview .................................................................................................................................196
ACCESSORIES AND REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ......................................197
Overview .................................................................................................................................197
Part Numbers...........................................................................................................................198
14.1
14.2
15
APPENDICES....................................................................................................199
Table of Contents ....................................................................................................................199
Appendix A – Entering Values for Lead Resistance Compensation.......................................200
Appendix B – Entering Values for Lead Resistance Compensation [Titanium Cells]............202
Appendix C - Cyanide Waste Treatment.................................................................................204
Appendix D – Chrome Waste Treatment ................................................................................208
Appendix E – Two-cell Applications......................................................................................212
Appendix F – Using a Precision Check Resistor (For Conductivity) ....................................216
Appendix G – Noise Testing, Dissolved Oxygen Application................................................218
Appendix H – DO Probe and Analyzer Tests .........................................................................219
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15.6
15.7
15.8
15.9
15.10
15.11
15.12
Appendix I – Parameters Affecting Dissolved Oxygen Measurement................................222
Appendix J – Discussion on Chemical Interferences on Measured DO Currents ...............223
Appendix K – Percent Saturation Readout..........................................................................225
viii
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15.13
15.14
15.15
15.16
15.17
Appendix L – Leak Detection in PPB Applications............................................................226
Appendix M – Procedure for Low Level ppb Dissolved Oxygen Testing ..........................227
Appendix N – Sample Tap Electrode Mounting Recommendations...................................229
Appendix O – Auto Clean and Auto Cal Examples ............................................................231
Appendix P – AutoClean and AutoCal Theory and Piping.................................................234
15.17.1 AutoCal Sequence and Piping......................................................................................235
INDEX..........................................................................................................................239
3/08
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tables
Table 3-1 Procedure for Unpacking and Preparing the UDA2182 ______________________________ 10
Table 3-2 Panel Mounting Procedure ____________________________________________________ 11
Table 4-1 Procedure for installing AC Power Wiring________________________________________ 17
Table 5-1 Function of Keys____________________________________________________________ 22
Table 5-2 Display Details Functions _____________________________________________________ 24
Table 5-3 Changing PID Parameters on the Display_________________________________________ 27
Table 5-4 Manually Starting/Stopping the Auto Cycle_______________________________________ 31
Table 5-5 Conditional Sequencer Steps for Auto Cycle ______________________________________ 32
Table 5-6 Selecting the Pharma Test on Display ___________________________________________ 35
Table 5-7 Status Display Details ________________________________________________________ 41
Table 6-1 Basic Configuration Procedure _________________________________________________ 56
Table 6-2 Signal Sources______________________________________________________________ 58
Table 6-3 Analog Signal Sources _______________________________________________________ 59
Table 6-4 Digital Signal Sources________________________________________________________ 60
Table 6-5 Input Configuration__________________________________________________________ 63
Table 6-6 Outputs Configuration________________________________________________________ 74
Table 6-7 Relays Configuration ________________________________________________________ 77
Table 6-8 Alarms Configuration ________________________________________________________ 82
Table 6-9 Monitors Configuration_______________________________________________________ 83
Table 6-10 Math Configuration_________________________________________________________ 86
Table 6-11 Logic Configuration ________________________________________________________ 88
Table 6-12 Auxiliary Configuration _____________________________________________________ 90
Table 6-13 PID Configuration__________________________________________________________ 94
Table 6-14 PID Tuning _______________________________________________________________ 97
Table 6-15 PID Alarms _______________________________________________________________ 98
Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration _________________________________________________ 101
Table 6-17 Example Auto Cycling Configuration for pH____________________________________ 103
Table 6-18 Variables Configuration ____________________________________________________ 105
Table 6-19 Communication Configuration _______________________________________________ 106
Table 6-20 Maintenance Configuration__________________________________________________ 108
Table 7-1 Recommended Maximum Wire Size ___________________________________________ 116
Table 7-2 Procedure for installing Input and Output wiring __________________________________ 119
Table 8-1 Standard pH Buffer Values___________________________________________________ 142
Table 8-2 Calibrating pH Electrodes Using Automatic Buffer Recognition______________________ 143
Table 8-3 Procedure for Buffering Method of Calibrating pH Electrodes _______________________ 146
Table 8-4 Procedure for Sample Method of Calibrating pH Electrodes _________________________ 148
Table 8-5 Oxidation-Reduction Potential of Reference Solutions at Specified Temperature________ 152
Table 8-6 Procedure for Calibrating ORP System Using a Reference Solution ___________________ 152
Table 8-7 Procedure for Calibrating ORP Analyzer Using Voltage Input _______________________ 154
Table 8-8 Conductivity of Potassium Chloride Solutions at 25 °C_____________________________ 160
Table 8-9 Procedure for Performing Calibration Trim Using a Reference Solution________________ 160
Table 8-10 Procedure for Sample Method of Calibrating Cation pH ___________________________ 163
Table 8-11 Calibrating a Dissolved Oxygen Probe Using Air Calibration Method ________________ 167
Table 8-12 Calibrating a Dissolved Oxygen Probe Using Sample Calibration Method _____________ 169
Table 8-13 Calibrating the Integral Pressure Sensor________________________________________ 171
Table 8-14 Running a Probe Bias Scan__________________________________________________ 174
Table 9-1 Procedure for Calibrating Analyzer Outputs______________________________________ 181
Table 10-1 Procedure for Calibrating the Temperature Inputs ________________________________ 186
x
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 11-1 Cal History items _________________________________________________________ 189
Table 12-1 Status Messages __________________________________________________________ 192
Table 12-2 Probe Calibration Diagnostics________________________________________________ 193
Table 12-3 Auto Cycle Fail Messages___________________________________________________ 194
Table 12-4 Pharma Fail Messages______________________________________________________ 195
Table 14-1 Part Numbers_____________________________________________________________ 198
Table 15-1 Data for Concentration Range Measurements ___________________________________ 217
Table 15-2 Dissolved Oxygen Solubility vs. Temperature ___________________________________ 225
Figures
Figure 3-1 Panel Mounting Dimensions (not to scale) _______________________________________ 11
Figure 3-2 Rear Panel Support Plate Dimensions ___________________________________________ 12
Figure 3-3 Pipe Mounting Dimensions (not to scale) ________________________________________ 13
Figure 3-4 Wall Mounting Dimensions (not to scale)________________________________________ 14
Figure 4-1 Power Wiring______________________________________________________________ 19
Figure 5-1 UDA2182 Operator Interface (all display items shown) _____________________________ 21
Figure 5-2 Example – Two Input Display_________________________________________________ 25
Figure 5-3 PID Loop 1 Edit Display screen example ________________________________________ 26
Figure 5-4 Auto Cycle Display screen example ____________________________________________ 28
Figure 5-5 Pharma Display screen example _______________________________________________ 34
Figure 5-6 UDA for Cation and Degassed CO2_____________________________________________ 37
Figure 5-7 Cation Display screen example for pH calculations ________________________________ 39
Figure 5-8 Status Display screen example ________________________________________________ 41
Figure 5-9 Event History Display screen example __________________________________________ 46
Figure 5-10 Alarm Event Display screen example (Read Only)________________________________ 46
Figure 5-11 Screen capture of Process Instrument Explorer running on a Pocket PC_______________ 48
Figure 6-1 UDA2182 Block Diagram ____________________________________________________ 52
Figure 7-1 Wiring Terminals and board Location__________________________________________ 118
Figure 7-2 Terminal Designations for Durafet III Electrode__________________________________ 120
Figure 7-3 Terminal Designations for Durafet II Electrode __________________________________ 121
Figure 7-4 Terminal Designations for Meredian II Electrode_________________________________ 122
Figure 7-5 Terminal Designations for Meredian II Electrode with Quick Disconnect ______________ 122
Figure 7-6 Terminal Designations for ORP ______________________________________________ 123
Figure 7-7 Terminal Designations for Direct pH/ORP with Quick Disconnect Option_____________ 123
Figure 7-8 Terminal Designations for HPW7000 System____________________________________ 124
Figure 7-9 Terminal Designations for HB Series pH or ORP_________________________________ 125
Figure 7-10 Terminal Designations for Meredian Electrode with External Preamplifier ____________ 126
Figure 7-11 Terminal Designations for Durafet II Electrode with External Preamplifier____________ 127
Figure 7-12 Terminal Designations for Durafet II Electrode with Cap Adapter___________________ 128
Figure 7-13 Terminal Designations for Durafet III Electrode with Cap Adapter __________________ 129
Figure 7-14 Terminal Designations for Conductivity with Integral Cable _______________________ 130
Figure 7-15 Terminal Designations for Conductivity Cells with Quick Disconnect _______________ 130
Figure 7-16 Terminal Designations for Dissolved Oxygen with Integral Cable___________________ 131
Figure 7-17 Terminal Designations for Dissolved Oxygen with Quick Disconnect Option _________ 132
Figure 7-18 Terminal Designations for Communications Card _______________________________ 133
Figure 7-19 Terminal Designations for Power, Analog Output, and Relay Output ________________ 134
Figure 7-20 Terminal Designations for Option Board ______________________________________ 135
Figure 8-1 Resetting pH Offset and pH Slope_____________________________________________ 150
3/08
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure 8-2 Resetting ORP Offset ______________________________________________________ 156
Figure 8-3 Resetting Calibration Trim __________________________________________________ 162
Figure 8-4 Resetting pH Offset ________________________________________________________ 165
Figure 8-5 Display of Probe Bias Test Done in Air ________________________________________ 173
Figure 8-6 Resetting Pressure Offset or Bias Volts_________________________________________ 177
Figure 9-1 Resetting Output 1 Offsets (example) __________________________________________ 184
Figure 10-1 Resetting temperature offset ________________________________________________ 188
Figure 15-1 Example of a Conductivity Loop_____________________________________________ 200
Figure 15-2 Example of a Conductivity Loop_____________________________________________ 202
Figure 15-3 Cyanide Treatment System _________________________________________________ 204
Figure 15-4 First Stage Cyanide Oxidation - Typical Titration Curve __________________________ 205
Figure 15-5 Chrome Treatment System _________________________________________________ 208
Figure 15-6 Chrome Reduction - Typical Titration Curve ___________________________________ 209
Figure 15-7 Suggested ppb Dissolved Oxygen Test Set-up __________________________________ 228
Figure 15-8 Typical Probe Installation __________________________________________________ 229
Figure 15-9 Auto Clean Setup_________________________________________________________ 232
Figure 15-10 Auto Cal Setup__________________________________________________________ 233
Figure 15-11 Automatic Electrode Wash Setup __________________________________________ 235
Figure 15-12 Rinse and One-Point Calibration____________________________________________ 236
Figure 15-13 Two-Point AutoCal Operation______________________________________________ 237
xii
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
1 Introduction
1.1 Overview
Multi-function instrument
The UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer is the next level of dual channel analyzers
providing unprecedented versatility and flexibility.
The UDA2182 can accept single or dual inputs from Honeywell Direct pH, pH from
preamp, ORP (Oxidation Reduction Potential), Contacting Conductivity and Dissolved
Oxygen sensors. Measurements for Dual channel units can be arranged in any
combination of measurement.
User interface
“Process Information at a Glance” is a unique feature of the UDA2182 graphical
backlit LCD.
Two PV values with corresponding UOM (unit of measure), temperature, alarm state,
scales, and limits, tagging, and status messages can be displayed simultaneously.
Ten dedicated keys provide direct access to Setup configuration menus and sub-menus
and Calibration.
Easy to configure
Menu-driven configuration of the UDA2182 is intuitive, fast and easy. A Setup menu is
provided for every configuration task. You will be permitted to configure only those
parameters relevant to your application and supported by the Analyzer model you
purchased.
In fact, Setup configuration screens will contain only prompts and menu choices that
apply to your application.
Multi-language prompts guide the operator step-by-step through the configuration
process assuring quick and accurate entry of all configurable parameters. Nine languages
are available via configuration: English, French, German, Spanish, Italian, Russian,
Turkish, Polish and Czech.
Inputs
Analytical measurements of Direct pH, pH from preamp, ORP, Conductivity and
Dissolved Oxygen (ppm or ppb) can all be done in one analyzer. The unit can be used as
a single input or dual input instrument – you decide what measurements are included.
The input boards are factory calibrated and easily replaced. Addition of additional relays
or an analog output is done with a single board. The “Mix –n- Match” design reduces
inventory and increases flexibility. You can purchase a basic unit and then add input and
output boards as needed.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Outputs
Two standard Analog outputs 0 –20 or 4–20 mAdc, 750 ohms maximum, isolated from
inputs, ground, and each other, and independently assignable to any parameters and
ranges Proportional to user-set output range(s) of selected parameter(s).
One optional Analog output 0 –20 or 4–20 mAdc, 750 ohms maximum, isolated from
inputs, ground, and each other, and independently assignable to any parameters and
ranges.
Relays
Two 4A SPDT alarm/control relays are standard; with an additional two 4A relays
available as an option.
Infrared Communications
The infrared connection provides a non-intrusive wireless connection with the instrument
and maintains its weather tight integrity when combined with the optional PIE (Process
Instrument Explorer).
No need to get access to the back of the analyzer to communicate with the instrument, no
need to take your screw driver to wire the communication cable, no wiring mistake
possible. You can now duplicate an instrument’s configuration, upload or download a
new configuration in a matter of seconds, just by pointing your Pocket PC in the direction
of the instrument.
Communications Card (Optional)
The Communication card provides one Serial Port and one Ethernet Port.
Serial port provides
RS422/RS485 multi-drop
Modbus RTU protocol to read signals and read/write variables
Ethernet port provides:
Multi-language web pages to monitor readings, alarms, statuses, events
Multi-language web pages to setup Ethernet port settings
Multi-language email to send alarm status changes
Modbus TCP protocol to read signals and read/write variables
Both ports can communicate to a PIE tool
2
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
1.2 Features
Standard and solution temperature compensation
Measured pH temperature is compensated in one of two ways. Electrode temperature
sensitivity is automatically compensated to display the correct pH value at temperature.
In addition, displayed pH can be optionally normalized to a solution temperature of 25°C
as determined by the current Solution Temperature Coefficient, which is expressed in
units of pH/°C with precision to the hundredths decimal place. The parameter “Solu
Temp Coeff” allows the selection of Pure Water, Ammonia, Phosphate, Morpholine, and
Custom or None (User Entry).
Measured Conductivity and Resistivity can optionally be temperature compensated to
25°C for a specific solution type. TDS and concentration are always measured based on a
specific solution type. The cell constant and measurement type determines which solution
types are available for selection.
Dissolved Oxygen accurately measures the concentration of dissolved oxygen in water.
The Analyzer energizes the probe and receives dissolved oxygen and temperature signals.
Optional salinity compensation is provided. The Analyzer provides for Air or Sample
calibration with ambient temperature and atmospheric pressure compensation.
Calculated pH
High purity water pH can be calculated from Specific and Cation conductivities to be
used as a check on in-line high purity water pH measurements.
Automatic buffer recognition
“Buffer Group” types NIST/USP, USA, or Europe determines the set of standard pH
buffer values to be used for Zero and Slope calibration by automatic buffer recognition.
Each of the available Buffer Groups is a set of 5 or 6 pH buffer standards.
Solution Temperature Compensation
For high purity water measurement you can select pre-set compensations or configure
custom values.
USP26 Alarm Capabilities
Relays can be configured to alarm on conductivity values as determined by the USP26
standards.
Computed Variables
The availability of calculated variables in the list of available sources for alarms, math
and control and for status display is determined by similarity of units of measure between
the two input boards. For example with Dual Conductivity, %Rejection/Passage,
Difference, or Ratio can be displayed and assigned to the outputs or alarms.
CO2 concentration in ppm can be calculated from de-gassed conductivity measurement.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Password protection
Keyboard security protects configuration and calibration data. A password (up to four
digits) can be configured. If the security feature is enabled, the password will be required
to access configuration and calibration software functions.
Auto Clean/Auto Cal
Built-in real time clock is used to set-up versatile cycles that can be used to initiate
automatic sensor cleaning and then calibration.
Diagnostic/Failsafe Outputs
Continuous diagnostic routines detect failure modes, trigger a failsafe output value and
identify the failure to minimize troubleshooting time. The UDA2182 Analyzer performs
extensive self-diagnostics as a background task during normal operation. If a problem is
detected, a message is displayed on the Message stripe to alert the operator. In addition,
the operator can initiate keypad and display tests using Maintenance Menu functions.
High Noise Immunity
The analyzer is designed to provide reliable, error-free performance in industrial
environments that often affect highly noise-sensitive digital equipment.
Watertight corrosion-resistant case
CSA Type 4X (NEMA 4X) rated enclosure permits use in applications where it may be
subjected to moisture, dust, or hose-down conditions. The UDA2182 is designed for
panel, pipe or wall mounting.
4
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
2 Specifications
2.1 Specifications
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer
Graphical LCD with white LED Backlight
Viewing Area: 66.8 mm (W) X 35.5 mm (H)
Dot Pixels: 128 (W) X 64 (H)
Display
Display Ranges
pH:
0-14 pH
Temperature: -10 to 110°C (14 to 230°F)
ORP:
-1600 to +1600 mV
Conductivity:
0.01 Cell:
0.1 Cell:
1.0 Cell:
0-2 uS/cm displayable to 200 uS/cm; 0-0.2 mS/cm;
0-2,000 ppb TDS; 0-200 ppm TDS
0-20 uS/cm displayable to 2000 uS/cm; 0-2 mS/cm,
0-2,000 ppb TDS; 0-2,000 ppm TDS,
0-200 uS/cm displayable to 20,000 uS/cm; 0-20 mS/cm;
0-200 ppm TDS; 0-20 ppt TDS
10 Cell:
25 Cell:
0-2,000 uS/cm displayable to 99999 uS/cm; 0-200 mS/cm;
0-2,000 ppm TDS; 0-200 ppt TDS
0-20,000 uS/cm displayable to 99999 uS/cm; 0-500 mS/cm;
0-10% Concentration displayable to 20%
50 Cell:
0-20,000 uS/cm displayable to 99999 uS/cm; 0-1,000 mS/cm;
0-20% Concentration
Temperature: 0 to + 140°C (32 to 284°F)
Dissolved Oxygen:
0 - 20 ppm
0 –200 ppb, displayable to 20000 ppb
0 – 100% saturation, displayable to 200% saturation
Temperature: 2 – 60°C (35.6 – 104°F), must not freeze
10 Button Membrane Switch w/Directional Functionality
UV/Solvent/Abrasion Resistant
Keypad
Case Material
GE Valox® 357 (un-reinforced thermoplastic polyester)
Performances (Under
reference operating
conditions)
Accuracy: 0.5% of reading
Output Accuracy: +/- 0.01 mA
Drift: Negligible
Repeatability: 0.05%
Temperature Accuracy:
pH and Conductivity Thermistor: +/- 0.1°C from –10 to 100° C, +/- 1.0° C from 101° to 140° C
pH 1000 ohm RTD: +/- 0.4° C
D.O. Thermistor: +/- 0.1° C from 0 to 60° C
Reference Operating Conditions: 25 +/- 1° C; 10-40% RH; 120 or 240 Vac
Ambient Temperature
Operating Conditions
Operating: 0 to 60°C (32 to 140°F)
Storage: -30 to 70°C (-22 to 158°F)
RH: 5 to 90% max. Non-condensing up to 40°C (104°F). For higher temperatures the RH specification
is derated to maintain constant moisture content
Vibration:
5-15 Hz disp
8 mm pk to pk
2 G
15-200 Hz accel
Standard Analog Output
Optional Analog Output
Two 0-20 mAdc or 4-20 mAdc, 750 ohms max., isolated from inputs, ground, and each other,
Independently field-assignable to any parameters and ranges.
Proportional to user-set output range(s) of selected parameter(s),
One 0-20 mAdc or 4-20 mAdc, 750 ohms max., isolated from inputs, ground, and each other.
Independently field-assignable to any parameters and ranges
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer
Control Loop/Outputs
Control Loops: 2 standard (one for each PV); current, pulse frequency, or time proportional
Control Loop Types: PID (optional), Duplex (optional), On/Off (standard)
Auto-tuning: Accutune II, fuzzy logic overshoot suppression, applicable to both PID loops
Two SPDT (Form “C”) Relays
Standard Alarm/ Control
Relays
Resistive Load Rating: 4A, 120/240 Vac
Optional Additional
Two SPDT (Form “C”) Relays
Alarm/Control Relays
Resistive Load Rating: 4A, 120/240 Vac
Alarm/Control Settings
Alarm/on-off control delay: 0-100 seconds.
Alarm/on-off control deadbands: individually set, from 1 count to full scale for pH, ORP, and
temperature.
On/off cycle period: 0 to 1000 seconds.
On/off percent “on” time: 0 to 100%, 1% resolution.
Set point and proportional band limit ranges: ±19.99 pH, ±1999 mV, -10 to 130°C, 1 count resolution.
DAT cycle period: 1 to 1999 seconds.
PFT maximum frequency: 1 to 200 pulses/minute.
PFT pulse width: 50 ms, compatible with electronic pulse-type metering pumps.
Remote Preamplifier Input
Option
Optional input card to accept input signal from Honeywell digital preamplifiers:
Meridian II – 31075707 and 31022283
Durafet – 31079288 and Cap Adapter cables
pH Temperature
Compensation
Conventional compensation for changing electrode output (Nernst response), plus selectable solution
temperature compensation for high-purity water.
Calculated pH from
Differential Conductivity
User selectable when unit has two Conductivity inputs. Used when ammonia or amine is the water
treatment chemical.
Auto Buffer Recognition
(pH)
User Selectable
Available Buffer Series: NIST/USP, US, and Euro
NaCl, HCl, H2SO4, PO4, NaOH, NH3, C4H9C, Pure Water, Custom (User Selectable)
Conductivity
Compensations
Dissolved Oxygen
Measurement
Max flowrate (probe): 950 ml/min with flow chamber; no dependence on stirring or flowrate
Atmospheric pressure: 500-800 mm Hg with internal sensor, for calibration
Calibration with either Air or Sample
Auto Clean/ Auto Cal
Function
Real time clock is used to set-up cycles to initiate a cleaning and calibration sequence. Cycle Set-up is
user configurable.
Event History Screen
Calibration History Screen
Power Requirements
Wireless Interface
Event history screen stores 256 events with a description of the event and a Date/time stamp.
Calibration history screen stores information on 128 calibration events with a date/time stamp.
90 -264 Vac, 47-63 Hz, 15 VA. Memory retained by E2PROM when power is off.
Type: Infrared (IR)
Length of Link: 0 –1 M, 0 –15° Offset
Baud Rate: 9600
Data Format: Modbus Protocol
RS422/RS485 Modbus
RTU Slave
Communications Interface
(Optional)
Baud Rate: 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 selectable
Data Format:: IEEE floating point and 32-bit integer. Word swap configurable.
Length of Link:
2000 ft (600 m) max. with Belden 9271 Twinax Cable and 120 ohm termination resistors
4000 ft (1200 m) max. with Belden 8227 Twinax Cable and 100 ohm termination resistors
Link Characteristics: Two-wire (half-duplex), multi-drop Modbus RTU protocol, 15 drops maximum or
up to 31 drops for shorter link length.
Modbus RTU slave: Provides monitoring of inputs outputs, statuses, alarms, and variables. Provides
writing of variables for remotely modifying parameter settings.
6
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer
Ethernet TCP/IP
Communications Interface
(Optional)
Type: 10 or 100 BaseT; auto-speed and auto-polarity sensing
Length of Link: 330 ft. (100 m) maximum. Use Shielded twisted-pair, Category 5 (STP CAT5) Ethernet
cable.
Link Characteristics: Four-wire plus shield, single drop, five hops maximum
IP Address: IP Address is 192.168.1.254 as shipped from the factory
Recommended network configuration: Use Switch rather than Hub in order to maximize UDA Ethernet
performance
Configuration: Ethernet parameters are configured via the front-panel or web pages.
Modbus TCP/IP: Five simultaneous socket connections provide monitoring of inputs outputs, statuses,
alarms, and variables. Provides writing of variables for remotely modifying parameter settings.
Modbus TCP/IP Data Format: IEEE floating point and 32-bit integer. Word swap configurable.
Web server: multiple client support
Multi-language Web pages: monitoring inputs, outputs, statuses, alarms, and events
Multi-language Email: Alarm notification to eight email addresses. These must be configured using
web pages signed in as the administrator.
DHCP: ( Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) selectable via web page or front-panel
Safety Compliance
CE Compliance
UL/CSA General Purpose
FM/CSA Approval for Class I, Div 2; Groups A, B, C and D. T4, Ta =60°C
CE Conformity (Europe): CE Mark on all models signifies compliance to EMC Directive 84/336/EEC
and LVD Directive 73/23/EEC.
EMC Classification: Group 1, Class A, ISM Equipment
Method of Assessment: Technical File (EN61010-1; EN 61326)
Declaration of Conformity: 51453667
Case Dimensions
156 mm X 156 mm X 150 mm (6.14” X 6.14” X 5.91”)
Panel cutout: 138.5 mm X 138.5 mm (5.45” X 5.45”)
Panel thickness: 1.52 mm (0.06”) min, 9.5 mm (0.38”) max
Enclosure Rating
CSA Type 4X (NEMA 4X) rated enclosure
FM Class 1, Div 2
Installation Ratings
Installation Category (Overvoltage Category): Category II
Pollution Degree: 2
Altitude: 2000 m
Weight
Approx 3 lbs (6.6kg)
Mounting
Panel mounting-hardware supplied.
Optional Wall and 1” to 2” pipe mounting. Select option appropriate in Model Number.
2.2 CE Conformity (Europe)
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the following European
Council Directives: 73/23/EEC, the Low Voltage Directive, and 89/336/EEC, the EMC
Directive. Conformity of this product with any other “CE Mark” Directive(s) shall not be
assumed.
Product Classification: Class I: Permanently connected, panel-mounted Industrial
Control Equipment with protective earthing (grounding) (EN61010-1).
Enclosure Rating: The front panel of the analyzer is rated at NEMA4X when properly
installed.
Installation Category (Overvoltage Category): Category II (EN61010-1)
Pollution Degree: Pollution Degree 2: Normally non-conductive pollution with
occasional conductivity caused by condensation. (Ref. IEC 664-1)
EMC Classification: Group 1, Class A, ISM Equipment (EN61326, emissions), Industrial
Equipment (EN61326, immunity)
Method of EMC Assessment: Technical File (TF)
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
ATTENTION
The emission limits of EN61326 are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when this equipment is operated in an industrial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area may cause harmful interference. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and may cause interference to radio and television reception when the equipment is used closer
than 30 meters (98 feet) to the antenna (e). In special cases, when highly susceptible apparatus is used in
close proximity, you may have to employ additional mitigating measures to further reduce the
electromagnetic emissions of this equipment.
WARNING
If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the
equipment may be impaired.
8
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unpacking
3 Unpacking, Preparation, and Mounting
3.1 Overview
Introduction
This section contains instructions for unpacking, preparing, and mounting the Analyzer.
Instructions for wiring are provided in Section 4 (power wiring) and Section 7 (input
wiring). Software configuration is described in Section 6.
The UDA2182 Analyzer can be panel, wall, or pipe mounted.
Each unit has (4) 22.22mm [.87"] dia. holes on the bottom of the unit for lead wires and
conduit fittings. The user supplies the conduit fittings.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the case when connecting to a rigid metallic conduit system, the
conduit hub must be connected to the conduit before the hub is connected to the
enclosure
ATTENTION
When installing the unit, you must select appropriate watertight fittings to insure
watertight integrity.
What’s in this section?
The topics in this section are listed below.
Topic
See Page
3.1 Overview
9
3.2 Unpacking and Preparing
3.3 Mounting
10
10
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unpacking
3.2 Unpacking and Preparing
Procedure
Table 3-1 Procedure for Unpacking and Preparing the UDA2182
Step
Action
ATTENTION
For prolonged storage or for shipment, the instrument should be kept in its shipping container.
Do not remove shipping clamps or covers. Store in a suitable environment only (see specifications in Section 2).
Carefully remove the instrument from the shipping container.
1
2
Compare the contents of the shipping container with the packing list.
• Notify the carrier and Honeywell immediately if there is equipment damage or shortage.
• Do not return goods without contacting Honeywell in advance.
Remove any shipping ties or packing material. Follow the instructions on any attached tags, and then
remove such tags.
3
4
5
All UDA2182 Analyzers are calibrated and tested at the factory prior to shipment. Examine the model
number on the nameplate to verify that the instrument has the correct optional features.
Select an installation location that meets the specifications in Section 2. The UDA2182 can be panel-
, wall-, or pipe-mounted (see Section 3.3).
ATTENTION
Pipe mounting is not recommended if the pipe is subject to severe vibration. Excessive vibration may affect
system performance.
If extremely hot or cold objects are near the installation location, provide radiant heat shielding for the
instrument.
6
3.3 Mounting
Introduction
The Analyzer can be mounted on either a vertical or tilted panel or can be pipe or wall
mounted (option) using the mounting kit supplied. Overall dimensions and panel cutout
requirements for mounting the analyzer are shown in Figure 3-1. Pipe mounting is
shown in Figure 3-3. Wall Mounting is shown in Figure 3-4.
For Sample Tap Electrode Mounting recommendations, See Section 15.15 – page 229.
The analyzer’s mounting enclosure must be grounded according to CSA standard C22.2
No. 0.4 or Factory Mutual Class No. 3820 paragraph 6.1.5.
Before mounting the analyzer, refer to the nameplate on the outside of the case and make
a note of the model number. It will help later when selecting the proper wiring
configuration.
10
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unpacking
Panel Mounting Dimensions
+1
-0
+.04
-0
138
[5.43]
+1
-0
+.04
-0
138
[5.43]
Panel Cutout
Customer will need to provide a rear panel support
plate to maintain NEMA4 protection if primary
panel thickness is less that 2.3mm [0.09”] thick
CUSTOMER PANEL
1.6[.06] to 6.35 MAX[0.25]
156
33.5
152
[6.14]
[1.32]
[5.98]
156
[6.14]
(4) 22.22[.87] holes for
lead wires and conduit fittings
(conduit fittings supplied by user)
Figure 3-1 Panel Mounting Dimensions (not to scale)
Panel Mounting Procedure
Table 3-2 Panel Mounting Procedure
Step
1
Action
Mark and cut out the analyzer hole in the panel according to the dimension information
in Figure 3-1.
Orient the case properly and slide it through the panel hole from the front.
2
Customer will need to provide a rear panel support plate to maintain NEMA4
protection if primary panel thickness is less that 2.3mm [0.09”] thick –
See Figure 3-2.
Remove the mounting kit from the shipping container and clamp the edges of the
cutout between the case flange and the supplied U-bracket that is fastened to the rear
of the case using (2) M5 X 16mm long screws and (2) M5 lock washers supplied.
3
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unpacking
Rear Panel Support Plate Dimensions
Figure 3-2 Rear Panel Support Plate Dimensions
12
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unpacking
Pipe Mounting
The analyzer can be mounted vertically or horizontally on a pipe. Use the bracket and
hardware supplied in the mounting kit.
Select 1 inch or 2 inch U-Bolts.
ATTENTION
Pipe mounting is not recommended if the pipe is subject to severe vibration. Excessive
vibration may affect system performance.
M5 X 10mm long screw with M5 lock washer (2 places)
Note orientation of hole and slot in mounting bracket.
Hole is to be in the upper position.
M8 Nut
M8 Lock Washer
M8 Flat Washer
195.1
[7.68]
97.5
[3.84]
188.1
[7.40]
77.4
[3.05]
156
[6.14]
Do not over
1 or 2 inch Vertical Rear Pipe Mounting
tighten fasteners
4.5Nm (40 Lb-in) of
torque max.
97.5
[3.84]
97.5
[3.84]
188.1
[7.40]
78
[3.07]
78
[3.07]
1 or 2 inch Horizontal Rear Pipe Mounting
Figure 3-3 Pipe Mounting Dimensions (not to scale)
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unpacking
Wall Mounting Dimensions
The analyzer can be mounted on a wall. Use the bracket and hardware supplied in the
mounting kit.
188.1
[7.40]
195.06
[7.680]
Left hand
Side View
97.53
[3.840]
195.1
[7.68]
97.5
[3.84]
38.5
[1.51]
Front View
Mounting Bracket
Horizontal
77
[3.03]
83.9
[3.30]
167.6
[6.60]
Four slots in bracket for
6.0mm [1/4 “] dia mounting
bolts supplied by customer
83.9
[3.30]
167.8
[6.61]
Front View
Mounting Bracket
Vertical
38.5
[1.52]
77
[3.03]
Figure 3-4 Wall Mounting Dimensions (not to scale)
14
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Wiring
4 Power Wiring
4.1 Overview
Introduction
This section contains instructions for installing ac power wiring for the Analyzer, in
preparation for performing configuration setup as described in Section 6.
We recommend that you wait to install input and output wiring (See Section 7) until after
Configuration Setup. During configuration the software will determine for you, which
relay to use for each feature.
What’s in this section?
The topics in this section are listed below.
Topic
See Page
4.1 Overview
15
16
17
17
4.2 General Wiring Practices
4.3 Power Wiring Considerations
4.4 Installing Power Wiring
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Wiring
4.2 General Wiring Practices
WARNING
Qualified personnel should perform wiring only.
Safety precaution
WARNING
A disconnect switch must be installed to break all current
carrying conductors. Turn off power before working on
conductors. Failure to observe this precaution may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING
An external disconnect switch is required for any hazardous
voltage connections to the relay outputs.
Avoid damage to components
ATTENTION
This equipment contains devices that can be damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD). As
solid-state technology advances and as solid-state devices get smaller and smaller, they
become more and more sensitive to ESD. The damage incurred may not cause the device to
fail completely, but may cause early failure. Therefore, it is imperative that assemblies
containing static sensitive devices be carried in conductive plastic bags. When adjusting or
performing any work on such assemblies, grounded workstations and wrist straps must be
used. If soldering irons are used, they must also be grounded.
A grounded workstation is any conductive or metallic surface connected to an earth ground,
such as a water pipe, with a 1/2 to 1 megohm resistor in series with the ground connection. The
purpose of the resistor is to current limit an electrostatic discharge and to prevent any shock
hazard to the operator. The steps indicated above must be followed to prevent damage and/or
degradation, which may be induced by ESD, to static sensitive devices.
Wiring for immunity compliance
In applications where either the power, input or output wiring are subject to
electromagnetic disturbances, shielding techniques will be required. Grounded metal
conduit with conductive conduit fittings is recommended.
Connect the AC mains through a fused disconnect switch.
Conform to code
Instrument wiring should conform to regulations of the National Electrical Code.
16
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Wiring
4.3 Power Wiring Considerations
Recommended wire size
Observe all applicable electrical codes when making power connections. Unless locally
applicable codes dictate otherwise, use 14-gauge (2.081 mm2) wire for ac power,
including protective earth.
Power supply voltage and frequency within specs
The power supply voltage and frequency must be within the limits stated in the
specifications in Section 2.
4.4 Installing Power Wiring
Procedure
WARNING
Turn power off at mains before installing AC Power Wiring.
Do not remove boards with power ON.
WARNING
The ground terminal must be connected to a reliable earth
ground for proper operation and to comply with OSHA and
other safety codes. If metal conduit is used, connect a bonding
wire between conduits. Do not rely upon the conductive coating
of the instrument case to provide this connection. Failure to
observe this precaution may result in serious personal injury.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the case when connecting to a rigid metallic conduit system, the
conduit hub must be connected to the conduit before the hub is connected to the
enclosure
Table 4-1 Procedure for installing AC Power Wiring
Step
1
Action
Check the tag on the outside of the case to be sure that the voltage rating of the unit
matches the input voltage at your site.
ATTENTION
The Unit may be damaged if you apply power with the wrong voltage.
2
With Power off, open the case:
• Loosen the four captive screws on the front of the bezel.
• Grasp the bezel on the right side. Lift the bezel gently and swing the bezel open to the left.
Refer to Figure 7-1 for the location of the printed wiring board retainer. Loosen the two
3
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Wiring
Step
Action
screws that hold the retainer and slide the retainer to the left until the retainer tabs
disengage from the terminal boards.
Refer to Figure 7-1 for the location of the Power Supply/Analog Output/Relay Output board.
Insert a screwdriver into the hole in the middle of the terminal board and pull out gently.
Slide the board half way out. There is a notch in the terminal board into which you can slide
the retainer tabs and hold the board in place while wiring.
4
5
Install a fused disconnect switch in the power line that will be connected to the Analyzer.
•If a 230/240 Vac line is to be connected, use a 0.15 amp fuse.
•If a 110/120 Vac line is to be connected, use a 0.30 amp fuse.
Fuse must be a Time-Delay or Slo-Blo type.
Each unit has (4) 22.22mm [.87"] dia. holes on the bottom of the unit for lead wires and
conduit fittings. Conduit fittings to be supplied by the user.
6
Feed the power wiring through the wiring port on the bottom of the case. Connect the power
wiring to terminals L1 and L2/N as shown in Figure 4-1. Connect the Green safety ground
wire to the grounding stud on the case.
Attention: Terminal 1 must be connected to the ground stud on the grounding bar using
a #14 AWG UL/CSA-approved wire.
Slide the retainer to the left then slide the terminal board back into place. Slide retainer to
engage the tabs and tighten the screws.
7
8
Close the Bezel and secure four captive screws to a torque value of .20 Nm (1.5 Lb-in).
Power up the unit.
Do not apply power until the bezel is closed.
18
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Wiring
13
12
11
10
9
Analog Output 1 (+)
Analog Output 1 (–)
Analog Output 2 (+)
Analog Output 2 (–)
Relay Output 1 (N.O.)
Relay Output 1 (COM)
Relay Output 1 (N.C.)
Relay Output 2 (N.O.)
Relay Output 2 (COM)
Relay Output 2 (N.C.)
8
7
6
5
4
AC Hot L1
AC N L2
Case Earth Ground
1
Grounding Stud
on Case
Figure 4-1 Power Wiring
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
5 Operating the Analyzer
5.1 Overview
Introduction
This section contains instructions for operating the Analyzer.
What’s in this section?
The topics in this section are listed below.
Topic
See Page
20
5.1 Overview
5.2 Analyzer Overview
5.3 Key Navigation
21
22
5.4 Displays Overview
5.5 Input Displays
23
25
5.6 PID Displays
26
5.7 Auto Cycle Displays
5.8 Pharma Display
28
33
5.10 Status Display
41
5.11 Event History
46
5.12 Process Instrument Explorer Software
48
20
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
5.2 Analyzer Overview
The UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer is the next level of dual channel analyzers
providing unprecedented versatility and flexibility.
The analyzer can accept single or dual inputs from Honeywell Direct pH, pH from
preamp, ORP (Oxidation Reduction Potential), Contacting Conductivity and Dissolved
Oxygen sensors.
Measurement for Dual channel units can be arranged in any combination of
measurement.
A Communications card provides one Serial Port (RS485) and one Ethernet Port.
Figure 5-1 UDA2182 Operator Interface (all display items shown)
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
5.3 Key Navigation
Table 5-1 shows each key on the operator interface and defines its function.
Table 5-1 Function of Keys
Key
Function
• When process values are on display: Use DISPLAY to cycle between PV
Displays, PID Loop Displays, Auto Cycle Displays, Pharma Displays, Cation
Display, Status Displays and an Event History Display.
Display
• In Setup mode, calibration mode, or calibration edit mode, use DISPLAY to
abort current mode and return to the last accessed online display.
• Engages hold of analog and digital values at their current values and any
relays assigned to alarm events or control are deactivated.
Hold
ATTENTION: This takes precedence over the FAILSAFE function.
• Selects the configuration main menu when online, in calibration mode, or at a
calibration submenu.
Setup
Exit
• In configuration menu, exits submenu to parent menu. If at configuration main
menu, selects current online display.
• In configuration edit mode, aborts editing of current parameter.
• When online, acknowledges current alarm event to stop the flashing of the
relay indicator and status message area.
• Selects the calibration main screen when online, in configuration mode or at
another calibration screen.
Calibrate
• When a Setup configuration menu or configuration edit screen is on display:
Use Up/Down keys to highlight a different item.
• In configuration edit mode, either selects the parameter character or
numerical digit to change or selects an enumerated parameter value:
Use Up/Down key to increment the value of the digit at the cursor.
Increases/decreases the selected parameter value.
or
• When in display mode, use up/down keys to adjust the contrast on the screen.
• In configuration edit mode, selects the character or digit to change.
• In calibration mode, selects the next or previous calibration screen.
• In display mode, selects a single or dual display on a unit with dual input.
or
• In configuration menu, selects edit mode for selected parameter.
• In configuration edit mode, saves edited parameter selection or value.
Enter
• In calibration mode, selects parameters to reset and the next calibration
screen.
22
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
5.4 Displays Overview
Viewing the Displays
Display
To view display screens, push the
key. Pushing the Display key repeatedly scrolls through
screens which show the current status of pH/ORP, Conductivity, or Dissolved Oxygen
Concentration. There are displays for PID, Auto Cycle, and Pharma. It also lets you view a Status
Display and an Event History Display.
Displays Shown
One Input - When only one input board is installed, the online screen displays one PV and its
units in a larger font size (Section 5.5).
Two Inputs - When two input boards are installed, the online screen displays two PVs and its
units in a smaller font size. Press
to see single PV screens (Section 5.5).
PID - When PID 1 or 2 is active (Section 5.6 ), there is a display screen for each. There is a sub-
screen that allows editing of the Setpoint value, Setpoint Source, Control Mode, and Output
value. You can also enable or disable Accutune and Tune set.
Auto Cycle – When Auto Cycle 1 or 2 is active (Section 5.7), there is a display screen for each.
There is a sub-screen that allows you to start or stop the Cycle.
Pharma – Enabled in Conductivity inputs. Each Pharma screen monitors standard procedure
stages for determining Purified Water. There is a sub-screen that allows you to change the
Pharma Test Stage and adjust the Pct Warning value (Stage 1), Test µS/cm value (Stage 2) and
the Test pH (Stage 3). (See Section 5.8 for details)
Cation Calc – When cation Calc 1 or 2 is active there is a display screen for either cation
or degassed CO2 measurement. (Section 5.9)
Status Display - of Alarms Status, PID Alarms Status, Logic Status, Input Status, Output Levels,
Relay States, Monitor Status, Math Values, Aux Values, Variables, Comm Status, System Status,
and Calculated Values. (Section 5.10)
Event History - Event History records events with timestamp. (Section 5.11) Events recorded
include setup change, power on, calibrations (no values) and alarms with detail available on alarm
type and source by scrolling and selecting event name. Status warns of event history at 50% and
90% and when erasing old records.
Contrast Adjustment
When viewing a PV or Control display, you can adjust the contrast by pressing the or
key.
Bargraphs Overview
Output Bargraphs will represent up to three current output values. On the display, the Bargraphs
are the output in Engineering Units. The corner annunciators are the physical relay states (light –
de-energized, dark – energized). The third output and the 3 and 4 relays are shown only when the
source other than NONE is selected.
Menu Indicators
An upward-pointing arrow indicator above the menu at the left end of the header appears when
there are currently menu items above the screen accessible by moving the cursor up.
A downward-pointing arrow indicator below the menu at the left end of the status footer appears
when there are currently menu items below the screen accessible by moving the cursor down.
Use the
keys.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
Online Functions
Table 5-2 Display Details Functions
Detail
Function
When two input boards are installed, the default online screen displays both PVs and
their units of measure, as determined by the input boards, the probe (if memory-
embedded) or any measurement configuration options that may be available. When
only one input board is installed, the default online screen displays one PV and its units
in a larger font size.
Process Variable
Values
The currently selected PV type determines the numerical format and the units of
measure on the online PV display. Measured PV is generally displayed in the highest
decimal precision possible with five digits and has a potentially displayable range of
0.0000 to 99999. The exceptions are dissolved oxygen, pH, ORP and temperature,
which are displayed with fixed decimal precision.
PV Type determines specific ranges and in the case of Conductivity, cell constant
determines available PV Types. Each PV measurement and display is updated every
500ms maximum. Each temperature measurement and display is updated every 10
seconds maximum.
See the Specific Input configuration for available ranges. (Section 6.6)
The real-time displays of process values show the instrument’s tag name (or other
configurable fixed sixteen-character string) at the top of the screen.
Tag Name
Each PV value is accompanied by a temperature value for all measurements except
ORP, as ORP probes do not contain temperature sensors and no measurement
compensation for temperature is required. Temperature values are displayed in units of
degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius as determined by configuration.
PV Temperature
Measured temperature is always expressed in fixed tenths decimal precision and has a
displayed range according to input type:
PH/ORP
-10.0 to 110.0°C or 14.0 to 230.0°F
0 to 140.0°C or 32.0 to 284°F
0 to 60.0°C or 32 to 140°F
Conductivity
Dissolved Oxygen
A text string appears on the bottom of all displays. Online displays provide messages
relaying online diagnostics, alarms and other events. Offline screens display messages
relevant to data entry and calibration. See Section 12.
Status Messages
Bargraphs
The Bargraphs will represent up to three output values. The corner indicators represent
the physical state of the Relay Outputs [1, 2, 3, and 4].
*Note that all values and indicators on the main (input) display screen are maintained in the input setup
group.
24
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
5.5 Input Displays
Two Input Display
Display
Press
. You will see:
PV1 Value
Tag Name
PV Units
PV Temperature
Relay 1 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized
Relay 3 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized
UDA2182
3
1
pH
7.00
Solution Temperature
Compensation PV1
C4H9NO
25.0
ºC
ºC
3
1
2
Output 3 Bargraph*
Output 1 Bargraph*
Output 2 Bargraph*
µS/cm
0.000
0.0
Probe PV 2 Fault
NaCl
Solution Temperature
Compensation PV2
2
Relay 4 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized
4
Relay 2 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized
PV2 Value
Diagnostics or Alarm Message
*On the display, the bargraphs are the outputs in Engineering Units,
the corner annunciators are the physical relay states.
Figure 5-2 Example – Two Input Display
Single Displays
For single displays on a two input unit;
Press
Press
Press
to display a single display for Input 1.
again to display a single display for Input 2.
again to return to a Dual Display.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
5.6 PID Displays
Overview
When PID 1 or 2 is active - there is a display screen for each. There is a sub-screen that
allows editing of the Setpoint value, Setpoint Source, Control Mode, and Output value.
You can also enable or disable Accutune and Tune Set.
Selecting Control Display
Display
Press
until you see the PID Display screen. If PID 1 and 2 have been configured,
press DISPLAY again. In each instance, you can edit some control parameters. See Table
5-3.
PID Loop
PV1 or PV 2 Value
1 or 2
PV Units
Control Mode
Auto or Manual*
Relay 1 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized
Relay 3 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized
PID LOOP 1
3
1
pH
0.00
Output Value*
2
1
Auto
0.00 0.0
Setpoint Indicator
Relay 2 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized
2
Relay 4 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized
4
Working Setpoint Value*
*These Control parameters can be edited. See Table 5-3.
Figure 5-3 PID Loop 1 Edit Display screen example
26
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
Changing Parameters on the PID Display
When either PID Display is on the Display screen, you can edit the Setpoint value,
Setpoint Source, Control Mode, and the Output value. You can also enable or disable
Accutune and Tune Set.
Table 5-3 Changing PID Parameters on the Display
Press
Action
to access the PID Parameters. You will see:
PID LOOP 1
Enter
LSP
0.00
SP Source
Mode
Local SP
Manual
Output
0.00
Tune Set 2
Disable
Example – PID Loop 1 Edit Display
to highlight the parameter you want to change.
to access the value or selection of each.
Enter
to change the value or selection.
Note: Output can only be changed in Manual mode.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – ”General Rules for Editing”.
to make the edit permanent.
Enter
to return to the selected PID Display.
Display
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
5.7 Auto Cycle Displays
5.7.1 Overview
Auto Cycling allows each input probe to be automatically rinsed and calibrated on a
recurring schedule, in response to an event, or on demand.
Auto cycling is supported with Setup Menus ( Section 6.15- Auto Cycle Configuration),
Status Displays (Section 5.10 – Status Display) and Operational Displays (Section 5.7 as
well as Event History (Section 5.11) and Calibration History logging (Section 11).
5.7.2 Access to Auto Cycle Displays
• When Auto Cycle is enabled (see Auto Cycling Setup –Section 6.15),
Display
press
until you see:
Sequence
Step*
Auto Cycle 1 or 2
Current Clock Time or
remaining Elapsed Time
Relay 1 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized
AUTO CYCLE 1
Relay 3 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized
3
1
Cycle Stop
12:48:27
PV
PV Units
µS/cm
2
1
0.00
Input Temperature
27.2 ºC
Next 06-05-01 12:00:00PM
Date and Time of next cycle;
Cycle Timer is Off:
or Fail Detail Message
Relay 2 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized
2
4
Relay 4 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized
* See Table 5-5.
Figure 5-4 Auto Cycle Display screen example
28
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
5.7.3 How it works
Each occurrence of a sequence of actions for the cleaning and calibration of a probe is a
cycle. The status message “Auto Cycle n Active” appears for the duration of a non-
failing cycle (where n refers to 1 or 2). Each cycle consists of the following sequence that
will vary depending on the input type and parameters selected:
Cycle Start
Probe Extract (if enabled)
Probe Rinse
Cal pt 1
Cal pt 2 (If the input is pH)
Probe Insert (If enabled)
Resume Delay (If a time is selected)
For a more detailed explanation please refer to Table 5-5.
5.7.4 Displays
The current sequence step is shown in the upper half of the Auto Cycle display.
When Cycle Stop is displayed, the field to the right displays the current clock time in the
format configured in Setup/Maintenance/Clock.
When the cycle is active, the same field provides the remaining elapsed time for the
current sequence step.
The lower half of the Auto Cycle display provides either: the date and time of the next
cycle, an indication that the cycle timer is off; or an auto cycle fail detail message.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
5.7.5 Hold Active
If Hold Active is enabled in Auto cycling Setup, then the values remain in the hold state
during auto cycle. When Hold is active on either input, the status message “Hold Active”
is displayed and the specific PV value flashes at a very slow rate.
When Hold is activated manually from the front panel Hold button, the values remain in
the hold state until its state is changed via the front panel again.
5.7.6 Probe Transit
This parameter is available to allow you to automate functions that relate to probe
removal and insertion. Once the probe transit parameter is enabled, the extract wait
source, insert wait source and max transit mins can be selected. The extract wait source
and insert wait source can be set to any digital input so that the extract or insert
operations continue until the selected digital input is low. Once the wait source signal is
low then the probe extraction or insertion sequence step can end or otherwise time out if
the duration of the “max transit mins” is exceeded. If probe transit is enabled and probe
extract src/insert src is set to none, then the probe extract/insert step will occur for the
duration of the max transit mins.
5.7.7 Cycle Start Src
The Auto cycle can be started in one of three ways. It can start upon the occurrence of a
specific digital input changing state from low to high. The cycle can also start when the
cycle timer engages. The cycle can also be manually started from the Auto Cycle display
screen op panel.
5.7.8 Cycle Interval
This parameter enables the cycle timer and allows you to set the Auto cycle to recur at a
period defined by you. If the cycle interval is set to Custom, Monthly, Weekly or Daily
then specific menu items are activated to set-up cycle start and period times. You can
select a cycle interval appropriate to the application.
5.7.9 Rinse Cycle Cnt
This parameter allows you to select when or if a rinse sequence occurs during a cycle. A
selection of 0 indicates that a rinse sequence will not occur. A selection of 1 indicates
that a rinse sequence occurs during every cycle. There is an option to set the rinse
sequence for less frequent times by selecting values from 2 to 100. For example; a
selection of 3 means that the rinse sequence will occur every 3rd cycle.
5.7.10 Rinse Mins
This parameter allows you to select the duration of a rinse.
5.7.11 Resume Dly Mins
This parameter allows you to specify a delay time before the cycle is completed.
30
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
5.7.12 Manual Starting/Stopping the Auto Cycle
Pressing Enter on the Auto Cycle Operational Display brings up an operator panel menu
that enables you to manually start or stop an auto cycle sequence or place the cycle in
Hold, regardless of whether or not the cycle timer is configured. Start cycle is visible
when the Auto Cycle is not active and Stop Cycle is visible during an auto cycle.
The objective of a Cycle Stop is to terminate the Auto Cycle by putting the probe back
into the process. The selection of Cycle Stop causes the sequencer to proceed directly to
the Probe Insert stage, if Probe Transit is enabled, and then to the Resume Delay stage.
Selecting Stop Cycle during Probe Insert advances the sequencer to resume delay.
Finally, a Stop Cycle selection during Resume Delay will stop the cycle completely.
If enabled, the cycle timer will still trigger a cycle at the configured time provided the
sequencer returns to Cycle Stop beforehand. Otherwise, the cycle will execute at the next
available time.
The Hold Cycle selection is available in both auto cycle active and inactive states. When
inactive, enabling Hold Cycle will hold the sequencer at the beginning of the sequence
until released to continue by disabling the Hold Cycle.
Selecting Hold Cycle during an active cycle will suspend the sequencer at the current
step as well as the step timer. Disabling Hold Cycle will resume the sequencer and step
timer. During cycle Hold, the status bar will show the message “Auto Cycle in hold”.
Table 5-4 Manually Starting/Stopping the Auto Cycle
Press
Action
to access the Auto Cycle Operator Panel. You will see:
Enter
AUTO CYCLE 1
3
1
12:48:27
Cycle Stop
Start Cycle
Hold Cycle
No
2
1
No
0.
27.2 ºC
Next 06.03.29 13:50:24
2
4
Example – AUTO CYCLE 1 Operator Panel
Note: The item “Start Cycle” is replaced with “Stop
Cycle” when the cycle is active.
To access Start Cycle or Hold Cycle
to access the Start Cycle/Hold Cycle selection.
Enter
to change the selection from NO to YES.
Start Cycle
Hold Cycle
YES
No
to Start or Hold the Auto Cycle.
See Table 5-5 for sequencer steps.
Enter
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
5.7.13 Auto Cycle Fail
The status message “Auto Cycle n Fail” is displayed during a fail state. Once detected,
the current cycle proceeds immediately to the Probe Insert step (if enabled) or to the
Resume Delay step. The fail state remains for the duration of the Resume Delay,
whereupon the fail state returns to zero and the fail message is cancelled.
A fail state also provides a detail message in the lower half of the Auto Cycle display
regarding the specific reason for the error. These messages are listed in Section 12.4.
The digital output “AC n Fail” is also available and is active whenever an auto cycle
failure has occurred. The auto cycle digital outputs: AC n Extract, AC n Rinse, AC n Cal
Pt 1 and AC n Cal and AC n Cal 2 are available as relay digital input sources (See Table
6-4) to control the operation of valves and solenoids for exposure to rinse water and
buffer solutions or air to accomplish the automatic probe rinse and calibration functions.
5.7.14 Conditional Sequencer Steps
Table 5-5 Conditional Sequencer Steps for Auto Cycle
Step
AC n
Extract Rinse
AC n
AC n
Cal
AC n
Cal 2
Output
Hold
Condition
State
(if
enabled)
Cycle Stop
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Inactive
Active
Cycle inactive
Cycle Start
(transitional)
Operator panel Cycle Start is Yes
or Cycle Start Src state is 1
or cycle timer engages
Probe Extract
Probe Rinse
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
Active
Active
Probe Transit is enabled
Rinse Cycle Cnt > 0 and enables
current cycle
and if Probe Transit enabled,
Extract Wait Src is None or state is
1 or Max Transit Timer expires
Cal Point 1
Cal Point 2
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
Active
Active
Rinse timer expires if enabled
and Cal 1 (Cal) Cycle Cnt > 0 and
enables current cycle
Rinse timer expires or Cal 1
complete
and Cal 2 Cycle Cnt > 0 and
enables current cycle
Probe Insert
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Active
Active
Auto Cycle Fail
or Probe Transit is enabled
Auto Cycle Fail
Resume Delay
or Rinse timer expires or Cal 1 or
Cal 2 complete
and Insert Wait Src is None or state
is 1 or Max Transit Timer expires
32
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
5.8 Pharma Display
5.8.1 Overview
The Pharma Parameter is available when a Conductivity Input is enabled. Pharma
supports USP (United States Pharmacopoeia) and PhEur (Pharmacopoeia Europa)
standard procedure stages for determining Purified Water.
Selecting Pharma Type USP or PhEur (in Section 6.6 – Conductivity Input
Configuration) enables the Pharma monitor screen and adds it to the sequence of displays
accessed by each press of the Display button.
Also, configure Pharma PV High, Pharma PV Low, and Pharma Timer Minutes in this
section.
5.8.2 How it works
Pharmacopoeia Test Procedure
For Procedure steps in each stage, refer to UPS section <645> Test Procedure for
Purified Water and Water for Injection. The procedure for this determination involves a
series of three stages or tests. If the sample does not pass the Stage 1 conductivity
requirement, the State 2 test can be initiated. If the Stage 2 requirements are not met,
then the Stage 3 test can be initiated. If Stage 3 requirements are not met, the sample is
not Purified Water.
In Stage 1 the non-temperature-compensated conductivity reading is compared to the
value specified in the USP standard for a particular temperature. If the measured
conductivity is not greater than the table value, the water meets the requirements of the
test for conductivity and the Pharma test is complete. If the conductivity is higher than
the table value, then the user can manually proceed with Stage 2.
To complete stage 2, transfer a sufficient amount of water (100 mL or more) to a suitable
container, and stir the test specimen. While maintaining the temperature at 25° ± 1°,
begin vigorously agitating the test specimen and note the conductivity reading when the
change is less than 0.1 m S/cm per 5 minutes. If the conductivity is not greater than 2.1
m S/cm, the water meets the requirements of the test for conductivity. If the conductivity
is greater than 2.1 m S/cm, proceed with Stage 3.
Stage 3 must be completed within approximately 5 minutes of the conductivity
determination in stage 2. While maintaining the sample temperature at 25° ± 1°, add a
saturated potassium chloride solution to the same water sample (0.3 mL per 100 mL of
the test specimen), and measure the pH to the nearest 0.1 pH unit, as directed under pH
(791). From USP section <645>, determine the desired conductivity value for a pH value
between 5pH and 7pH. If the measured conductivity is not greater than the conductivity
from USP, section <625>, the water meets the requirements for stage 3 - purified water.
If either the measured conductivity is greater than this value or the pH is outside of the
range of 5.0 to 7.0, the water does not meet the requirements of stage 3 - purified water.
For Procedure steps in each stage, refer to UPS section <645> Test Procedure for
Purified Water and Water for Injection.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
The UDA also supports Pharma Europa (PhEur) section 2.2.38, which specifies tests for
determining Highly Purified Water which are identical to USP Stages 1, 2 and 3. PhEur
adds a less demanding test for determining Purified Water at the end of the sequence.
5.8.3 Access to Pharma Display
• When Pharma is enabled (see Input Configuration – Section 6.6) press
Display
until you see:
The measured temperature-
uncompensated conductivity
of the solution in µS/cm
Right Pointer -
Warning Limit
relative to test limit
Pharma
Measurement
Relay 3 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized
Relay 1 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized
3
PHARMA 1
1
The measured temperature
of solution in system
temperature Units
Left Bar graph -Measured
solution conductivity scaled by
the parameter values Pharma
High and Pharma Low
µS/cm
0.966
1.30
Right Bar graph – Graphical percent of
measured conductivity relative to test limit
25.7 ºC
Stage 1
Left Pointer - Test Limit scaled
by parameters Pharma High and
Pharma Low
Currently select
Pharma Test
74.3%
The percent of measured
conductivity relative to test limit
Relay 2 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized
2
4
Purified water test
limit in units of
measured value
Relay 4 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized
Figure 5-5 Pharma Display screen example
5.8.4 Displays
The upper left portion of the screen shows the measured temperature uncompensated
conductivity of the solution in uS/cm for Stage 1. For stage 2 and 3 it displays the test
conductivity value entered during the measurement in stage 2
The process temperature is shown in the upper right of the screen
The lower right portion of the screen shows the USP stage 1 purified water limit, the
stage 2 limit of 2.1 uS/cm and the stage 3 purified water test limit at the measured pH.
When the Pharma n display window is active the various stages can be accessed through
the pharma op panel. (Table 5-6)
34
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
Table 5-6 Selecting the Pharma Test on Display
Press
Action
to access the Pharma Op Panel. A pop-up dialog box will appear:
Enter
Pharma Test
PCT Warn
Stage 1
80.00
Various parameters appear for each stage:
Parameter
Values
Visibility
Always on
Pharma Test Selection
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Pure H2O (PhEur only)
Pct Warning (% at
which the test warn
occurs)
0 to 100 %
Stage 1 only
Test µS/cm
Test pH
Stage 2 only
Stage 3 only
0 to 10 (default=10)
0 to 14 (default=0)
to access the Stage selection.
Enter
to change the selection to
Stage 1, Stage 2, Stage 3 or Pure H2O (PhEur only).
to make the selection permanent.
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
Enter
to select Pct Warning (Stage 1 only)
to access the Pct Warning Value and allow editing
to select a value
to make the selection permanent.
to select Test µS/cm (After Stage 2 is selected)
to access the Test µS/cm Value
to select a value
to make the selection permanent.
to select Test pH (After Stage 3 is selected)
to access the Test pH Value
to select a value
to make the selection permanent.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
5.8.5 Pharma Warning and Fail Signal
The Pharma 1 warning limit is entered from the op-panel for stage 1 and is user
selectable. The digital output “Pharma n Warn” is available (See Digital Source Selection
- Table 6-4).
The Pharma Fail signal is generated whenever any of the following conditions are met:
Stage 1 – Measured Conductivity exceeds 100%
Stage 1 – Temperature not within range of 0-100 degrees C
Stage 2 – Conductivity is 0.1 µS/cm or greater for 5 minutes
Stage 3 – pH not within range of 5 – 7pH
Stage 2 and 3 – Temperature not within range of 24 – 26 degrees C.
The digital output “Pharm n Fail” is available (See Digital Source Selection - Table
6-4).
When the Stage 2 or Stage 3 test is successful, the fail signal is cancelled and the Pharma
Timer begins to count down from the timer minutes value that was configured. When the
Timer countdown is completed, the Pharma function block returns to Stage 1. A fail
signal will return if measured conductivity exceeds 100% or warn signal if measured
conductivity exceeds Pct Warning value.
See Section 12.5 for Pharma Fail Messages.
36
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
5.9 Cation Calc Display
5.9.1 Overview
This group allows you to configure dual conductivity inputs for cation or degassed CO2
measurement. The cation selection of Ammonia or Amines will display a calculated pH
value from differential conductivity and provide continuous pH monitoring using
reliable, maintenance free conductivity cells. An outline of the conductivity cells’
installation is illustrated in Figure 5-6.
Gasses
Flow
Valve
Flow
Cell
Meter
#3
Cell
#2
Drain
Cell
#1
Inlet
Specific
Conductivity
From Cell #1
Cation
Conductivity
From Cell #2
Degassed
Conductivity
From Cell #3
UDA for Cation Conductivity
UDA for Degassed CO2
Figure 5-6 UDA for Cation and Degassed CO2
5.9.2 How it works
UDA2182 will monitor on-line treated water for Specific Conductivity and Cation bed
discharge conductivity, using reliable and maintenance free Honeywell conductivity
cells, and calculate the pH, using the assumption that the water is pure water with Amine
type treatment chemical and residual trace un-removed salts.
pH Calculation from Cation and Specific Conductivity
The equipment consists of Cell #1 which is used for specific conductivity determination
of the influent water sample. The water sample is then passed through a strong acid
cation exchange resin which replaces all cations in the influent stream with hydrogen ion.
On passing though the resin, a second Cell #2 is used to measure the effluent or cation
conductivity. These two measurements in combination are useful for measuring the
amount of base contained in the influent sample and the extent of contamination by
unwanted salts such as sodium chloride, sodium sulfate, etc.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
Degassed CO2
The dual input UDA can also be configured for degassed CO2 measurement by
employing cells #2 and #3. Here the cation effluent stream is degassed of CO2, typically
by heating the cation effluent stream to a near boiling temperature. This heating step
results in CO2 out-gassing. The resulting 25°C compensated conductivity measurement
of Cell #3 is lower in value in proportion to the amount of dissolved CO2.
5.9.3 pH Calculation from Specific and Cation Conductivity Setup
Connect cell 1 to input 1 and cell 2 to input 2. Follow the appropriate instructions to
configure the UDA for Cation Calc (See Section 6.18 – Maintenance Configuration.)
Under the sub menu selection of Inputs, the Cation Calc parameter offers two possible
selections.
1. pH Ammonia: Specific conductivity temperature compensation assumes
ammonia (NH3) is the base reagent. In addition to display of conductivity
values, this selection provides for determination and display of solution
pH value.
2. pH Amine pH: Specific conductivity temperature compensation assuming
a generic amine base. These include any one or combination of the
following amines:
Hydrazine
Morpholine
Ethanolamine
Aminomethylpropanol
Methoxypropylamine
4-aminobutanol
5-aminopentanol
Diaminopropane
Cyclohexylamine
Methylamine
Dimethylamine
1,5-diaminopentane
Piperidine
Pyrrolidine
This generic selection employs ammonia temperature compensation and
optimizes pH calculation for these base reagents.
38
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
Note: The relationship between the electrolytic conductivity and the pH of ammonia and amines is well
established in the technical literature. It must be understood that the UDA was designed for accurate
results over the pH range of 8 to 10.5 based on ammonia or amine chemistries. Other chemistries such as
phosphate or systems that employ alternative anions, such as borate, cannot be expected to realize results
with similar accuracy.
Standardization for cations
The UDA allows for a sample calibration of the cation pH value. Here an independent
sample is withdrawn from the sampling equipment and pH is determined with equipment
of known accuracy. This independent pH value is then entered into the UDA as a pH
calibration constant. To avoid process pH changes during standardization, it is very
desirable to complete the sample extraction, independent measurement and UDA update
as soon as possible.
5.9.4 Calibration
For Calibration procedure, refer to Section 8.7.7 Cation pH Calibration.
5.9.5 CO2 by Degassed Conductivity
The UDA can be configured for CO2 determination by degassed conductivity. The cation
conductivity cell is connected to Input 1 and the degassed sample conductivity cell is
connected to channel 2. The UDA performs HCl temperature compensation of both
measurements to 25°C. The difference between the cation and degassed 25°C values is
taken and ppb CO2 is determined by ASTM D 4519.
5.9.6 Access to Cation Display
• When Cation Calc is enabled (See Section 6.18 – Maintenance
Display
Configuration), press
until you see:
PV 1 Value
PV 1 Temperature
Relay 3 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized**
Relay 1 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized**
3
CATION CALC
1
Calculated Water pH
3.772 µS/cm
Specific Conductivity
28.4 ºC
Specific NH3
Output 3 Bar graph
PV 2 Temperature
Output 1 Bar graph
Output 2 Bar graph
pH
9.13
0.099 µS/cm
24.1ºC
PV 2 Value
Cation HCl
2
4
Relay 2 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized**
Cation Conductivity
Relay 4 Physical State
White – De-energized
Black - Energized**
Figure 5-7 Cation Display screen example for pH calculations
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
5.9.7 Troubleshooting
In normal operation, both the direct electrode pH measurement and the pH from
differential conductivity should very closely match each other.
If they DO NOT match each other, the possible causes are listed below:
1. Upsets in water chemistry, such as cation exchange resin exhaustion, can cause the
pH readings to not agree with each other.
CHECK EXCHANGE RESIN
2. A low reboiler temperature will not be effective in removing dissolved CO2
resulting in an incorrect and low CO2 indication.
CHECK REBOILER TEMPERATURE
3. Nernst Electrode pH system failure will cause the two readings to disagree.
Electrode pH systems are more susceptible to failure than conductivity cells, and
depleted reference electrodes (incorrectly LOW readings) or broken measuring
electrodes (usually incorrectly HIGH readings) can occur.
CHECK pH ELECTRODE SYSTEM
40
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
5.10Status Display
Overview
The Status Displays let you see the status of the Alarm Status, PID Alarm Status, Logic
Status, Input Status, Output levels, Relay states, Monitor Status, Math Values, Aux
Values, Auto Cycling, Variables, Comm Status, System Status, and the Calculated values
(Calc Values available only if both units of measurement are identical).
Access to Status Displays
Display
• Press
until you see:
STATUS DISPLAY
Alarm Status
PID Alarm Status
Logic Status
Input Status
Output Levels
Relay States
Monitor Status
Math Values
Aux Values
Variables
Comm Status
Auto Cycling (if configured)
Calc Values (if configured)
• Use the
• Press
keys to highlight the Status Display required.
to display the parameters and the status of each.
Enter
Figure 5-8 Status Display screen example
Table 5-7 Status Display Details
Status
Parameter
Status
Status Definition
Display
(Read Only)
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 4
ON
OFF
ON = Latching Alarm in alarm.
Alarm Status
Acknowledge alarm by changing status to OFF.
If status changes back to ON, alarm condition still
exists.
PID 1 Alm 1
PID 1 Alm 2
PID 2 Alm 1
PID 2 Alm 2
ON
OFF
ON = PID Alarm Active
PID Alarm
Status
PID alarms are not latching.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
Status
Parameter
Status
Status Definition
Display
(Read Only)
Logic 1
Logic 2
Logic 3
Logic 4
ON
Read Only
Logic Status
Off
In 1 Fault
In 2 Fault
OK or Fail
OK or Fail
Read Only – depends on the Input selected
Input Status
Digital In 1
Digital In 2
On or Off
On or Off
Output 1 mA
Output 2 mA
Output 3 mA
Output Level in Read Only – depends on the Output type selected at
Output
Levels
Milliamps
setup “Outputs”, “Output n”, “Source”:
None
Input 1 PV
Input 2 PV
Input 1 Tmp
Input 2 Tmp
Pharma Out 1
Pharma Out 2
Math 1
Math 2
Math 3
Math 4
Func Gen 1
Func Gen 2
Switch 1
Switch 2
Sum
Difference
Ratio
%Passage
%Rejection
PID 1
PID 2
See Table 6-6 for configuration.
Relay 1
Relay 2
Relay 3
Relay 4
State of the
relay
Read Only – state depends on the Output source
selected at Relay Setup Group, parameter “Relay
Types”:
Relay States
Digital Output (On or Off)
Time Proportional (Value)
Frequency Proportional Output (Value)
On/Off (On or Off)
Pulse Out (On or Off)
See Table 6-7 for configuration.
Monitor 1
Monitor 2
Monitor 3
Monitor 4
ON
Off
Read Only – State depends on the output of the
analog monitor blocks.
Monitor
Status
42
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
Status
Display
Parameter
Math 1
Math 2
Math 3
Math 4
Status
(Read Only)
Status Definition
Analog Values
Analog Values
Analog Values
Read Only – Shows the calculated values of the Math
blocks.
Math Values
Aux Values
Variables
Switch 1
Switch 2
Func Gen 1
Func Gen 2
Read Only – Shows the calculated values of the
blocks in the Aux Group. This includes the current
output of the Switch and Function Generator blocks.
AnlgVar 1
AnlgVar 2
AnlgVar 3
AnlgVar 4
Read Only – shows values of Analog and Digital
variables written from Modbus client.
Dgtl Var 1
Dgtl Var 2
Dgtl Var 3
Dgtl Var 14
Digital Values
(On or Off)
Read Only – This displays the status of the
Communication card. Information present only if the
Communication card is present.
Comm Card Stat
Ok/
Comm Status
Not Present/
HW Failure/
Fail
Comm Card Stat gives the status of the
communication card
Init
Status shown OK if the communication card is
working fine.
Status shown as Not present if the communication
card is not present.
Status shown as HW Failure if the communication
card is installed but unable to communicate to the
Main CPU board.
Status shown as Fail if the communication card is not
functioning properly. It could be the result of a
software failure, a bad flash chip on the board or
DHCP is selected but the DHCP server was not found.
Check cable connections and potential network issues
for DHCP related problems.
Status shown as INIT if the communication card is
getting initialized.
SW Version
Web Page
Value
Value
SW Version gives the software version of the
Communication Card.
Web Page gives the web page version number. The
web pages are separate from the Communication card
firmware, and can be upgraded independently. Both
the SW version and Web Page version should be the
same value to guarantee compatibility.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
Status
Parameter
Status
Status Definition
Display
(Read Only)
WebPgLngSet
EE/RT/PC
Identifies the web page language set programmed into
the Communications card.
EE web pages support English, French, German,
Italian and Spanish.
RT web pages support English, Russian and Turkish
PC web pages support English, Polish and Czech
Address
Value
Value
Yes/No
Address states the Modbus RTU slave ID
Baud Rate set for RS485
Baud Rate
Word Swap
Word Swap indicates whether the word order set for
Modbus Communications is Little Endian (NO) or Big
Endian (YES)
MACaddr Hi
Value
MACaddr Hi and MACaddr Low is the MAC address
MACaddr Low
of the Communication card
DHCP
Yes/No
DHCP indicates whether Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol is used.
DHCP is a protocol used by network devices (clients)
to obtain various parameters necessary for the clients
to operate in an Internet Protocol (IP) network.
IPaddr
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
IPaddr gives the IP address of the Communication
card.
SubnetMsk
Gateway
DnsSrvr
SubnetMsk indicates the Subnet mask used by the
Communication card.
Gateway Indicates the default Gateway IP address
used by the Communication card.
DnsSrvr displays the DNS (Domain Name Service)
server IP address used by the Communication card
SMTPsrvr
SMTPsrvr displays the SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer
Protocol) server IP address used by the
Communication card.
Next Rinse 1
Next Rinse 2
Next Cal 1
Date and Time Read Only – The Status Displays menu includes an
Auto Cycling selection when any auto cycle is enabled
and its cycle timer is also enabled. This display
provides information on the next occurrences of rinses
and calibrations for any auto cycle with timer
according to the configured cycle count of each
operation.
Auto Cycling
(if
configured)
Next Cal 2
44
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
Status
Display
Parameter
Sum
Status
(Read Only)
Status Definition
Value
Available only if both units of measure between the
two input boards are identical.
Calc Values
Difference
Ratio
(if
configured)
See Table 6-5 for configuration.
Sum = Input 1 + Input 2
%Passage
%Rejection
Difference = Input 1 – Input 2
Ratio = Input 1 / Input 2
%Passage = Min(Input 1 or 2)/Max(Input 1 or 2) *100
%Rejection = (1-Min(Input 1 or 2)/Max(Input1 or
2))*100
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
5.11 Event History
Overview
Event History records events with timestamp. Events recorded include setup change,
power on, calibrations (no values) and alarms with detail available on alarm type and
source by scrolling and selecting event name. Status warns of event history at 50% and
90% and when erasing old records.
Access to Event History Displays
Displa
• Press
until you see:
EVENT HISTORY
04.19 08:58
Setup Chg
Alarm 1 On
Setup Chg
03.15 13:02
03.15 13:01
Hold On
03.15 12:38
03.15 11:21
03.09 02:31
Setup Chg
Power On
HOLD ACTIVE
• Use the
keys to highlight the Event History required.
Enter
• Press
to display the event, date, time, and alarm parameters.
Figure 5-9 Event History Display screen example
Event History Display Example (Alarm)
ALARM 1 ON
Alarm 1
Event
Source
Input 1 PV
High
Type
State
Date
Time
On
2006/03/15
13:02:13
ALARM 1 INPUT 1 PV HIGH
Figure 5-10 Alarm Event Display screen example (Read Only)
46
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
Clear Event History
Setup
• Press
to display the Main menu.
Enter
• Use the
keys to select “Maintenance” then press
to enter the sub-
menu.
Enter
• Use the
• Use the
keys to select “Display” then press
to enter the sub-menu.
Enter
keys to select “Clr Evt Hist” then press
to allow change.
Enter
• Use the
keys to select “Yes” then press
to clear the Event History
screen.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
5.12Process Instrument Explorer Software
Overview
Process Instrument Explorer lets you configure your analyzer on a desktop/laptop or
Pocket PC. For details see Process Instrument Explorer manual #51-52-25-131.
Features
• Create configurations with intuitive software program running on a Pocket PC, a
Desktop or a laptop computer. ·
• Create/edit configurations live; just connect software to analyzer via IR port.
• Create/edit configurations offline and download to analyzer later via IR port.
• Infrared port available on every UDA2182.
• This software is available in English, Spanish, Italian, German, French, Russian,
Turkish, Polish and Czech.
• Generate Configuration Reports.
Figure 5-11 Screen capture of Process Instrument Explorer running on a
Pocket PC
48
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
Infrared communications
The infrared connection provides a non-intrusive wireless connection with the instrument
and maintains its waterproof integrity when used in conjunction with the optional PIE
(Process Instrument Explorer Software).
No need to get access to the back of the analyzer to communicate with the instrument, no
need to take your screw driver to wire the communication cable, no wiring mistake
possible. You can now duplicate an instrument’s configuration, upload or download a
new configuration in a matter of seconds, just by pointing your Pocket PC in the direction
of the instrument.
It takes just a few seconds to upload a configuration from an instrument. You can then
save the configuration file onto your PC or pocket PC for review, modification or
archiving. Furthermore, this software also gives you important maintenance information
on the analyzer: instantly, get information on the current operating parameters, digital
inputs and alarm status, identify internal or analog input problems.
Question: What if I have several analyzers on the same panel? How can I be sure I
am communicating with the correct one?
Answer: The infrared port of the analyzer is normally “off”. You activate the infrared
port on a particular analyzer by pressing any key. You can now communicate with the
analyzer. If no communications are received for 2 minutes, the port will be shut down
again.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the Analyzer
5.13 Modbus Communications
Overview
The UDA2182 provides Modbus communication support on two communication
interfaces using the optional Communication Card. A general summary is listed below.
For details see UDA2182 Communications User Guide #70-82-25-126.
Summary
Communications Card (Optional)
The Communications card provides one Serial Port (RS485) and one Ethernet Port.
Serial port provides
• RS422/RS485 multi-drop
• 1200 to 38400 programmable baud rate
• Modbus RTU protocol to read signals including PV, Temperature, Alarm Status,
outputs, relay status, etc.
• Read/write four analog and four digital variables (Note 1)
Ethernet port provides:
• Up to 5 Modbus TCP connections simultaneously
• Ethernet parameters are configured via the front-panel or web pages.
• Web server with up to10 clients simultaneously
• Multi-language Web pages (Note 2) setup the Ethernet port settings and monitor
readings, alarms, statuses, events
• Multi-language Email to send alarm status changes. Alarm notification to eight email
addresses. These must be configured using web pages signed in as the administrator.
• DHCP: ( Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) selectable via web page or front-panel
• Firmware upgrade to Main CPU board
• Firmware upgrade to Communications card
Note 1
There are four analog and four digital variables. These variables can be read and written remotely using Modbus
function codes.
Variables will appear as a selection for various parameters:
• Analog variables can be an alarm source, analog relay source, current output source, monitor source, math
source, auxiliary switch source, PID TRV, and PID remote setpoint.
• Digital variables can be an alarm disable, remote setpoint select, Tune Set2 select, digital relay source, logic-
in source, auxiliary switch select, PID TRC select, PID RSP select, and auto cycle start source
Note 2
Web pages provide the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Multiple language support
“Guest” accessibility for read-only permission
“Admin” accessibility for read and write permission
Readings of Inputs, Outputs, and Relay Outputs
Status of Inputs, Outputs, and Alarms.
Readings and Status of optional parameters (control, pharma, and auto-cycle)
List of last twelve events
Network configuration including IP address, subnet mask, gateway etc.
Email configuration for alarm event notification
50
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
6 Configuration
6.1 Overview
Introduction
Configuration is a dedicated operation where you use straightforward keystroke
sequences to select and establish (configure) pertinent setup data best suited for your
application.
To assist you in the configuration process, there are prompts that appear in the Main
Setup menu and associated sub menus. These prompts let you know what group of
configuration data (Set Up prompts) you are working with and also, the specific
parameters associated with each group.
What’s in this section?
The topics in this section are listed below.
Topic
See Page
51
6.1 Overview
6.2 UDA2182 Block Diagram
6.3 Main Setup Menu
52
53
6.4 Basic Configuration Procedure
6.6 Inputs Configuration
55
63
6.7 Outputs Configuration
6.8 Relays Configuration
6.9 Alarms Configuration
6.10 Monitors Configuration
6.11 Math Configuration
74
75
81
83
85
6.12 Logic Configuration
86
6.13 Auxiliary Configuration
6.14 PID Control Configuration
6.15 Auto Cycling Configuration
6.16 Variables Configuration
6.17 Communication Configuration
89
92
100
105
106
108
6.18
Maintenance Configuration
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
6.2 UDA2182 Block Diagram
Overview
PV
Analog
Input
(1-2)
Alarms
(1-4)
Relay
(1-4)
Time
Freq
Temp
Fault
Monitor
(1-4)
Relay
Digital
Input
(1-2)
Digital In
Math
(1-4)
Output
(1-3)
mA
Fault
Sum
Diff
Calc
Values
(Dual Input
Devices)
A
B
Logic
(1-4)
Ratio
% Passage
% Rejection
A
Switch
(1-2)
B
SW
PV
Func Gen
(1-2)
Signal Connection Key
Analog Connection
PV Connection
PV
RSP
FF
Out
PID
(1-2)
PID Opt
Installed
Alm 1
Alm 2
Digital Connection
RSP Select
Man Select
Figure 6-1 UDA2182 Block Diagram
52
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
6.3 Main Setup Menu
Accessing the Main Menu
Setup
Press
. The main Menu will appear.
Setup
Inputs
Outputs
Relays
Alarms
Monitors
Math
Logic
Auxiliary
PID Control*
Auto Cycling*
Variables
Communication
Maintenance
*Some item are dependent on the Option selection
Menu Indicators
An upward-pointing arrow indicator above the menu at the left end of the header appears
when there are currently menu items above the screen accessible by moving the cursor
up.
A downward-pointing arrow indicator below the menu at the left end of the status footer
appears when there are currently menu items below the screen accessible by moving the
cursor down.
Use the
keys.
Setup Group Overview
Refer to “General Rules for Editing” and Table 6-1 Basic Configuration Procedure to
configure the following Setup Groups.
Inputs Configuration (Table 6-5) – configure:
Input 1 and Input 2 for pH/ORP, pH Preamp, Conductivity, or Dissolved
Oxygen and associated parameters
Calc Value 1 and 2 (both units of measurement must be the same) select the
Calculation type [Ratio, sum, etc.], High range and Low range.
Outputs Configuration (Table 6-6) – configure Output 1, 2, or 3 source, % Range
High and Low and associated parameters
Relays Configuration (Table 6-7) – configure Relay 1, Relay 2, Relay 3, and
Relay 4 for Relay Types: Digital Out (Digital Output Relay), Time Prop (Time
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Proportional Output), Pulse Frequency (Pulse Frequency Type), Frequency Prop
(Frequency Proportional), or On/Off type and associated parameters.
Alarms Configuration ( Table 6-8) - configure Alarm 1 through 4 for Alarm’s
Source and associated parameters.
Monitors Configuration (Table 6-9) – configure Monitor 1 through 4 for
Monitor Type, Source and associated parameters.
Math Configuration (Table 6-10) – configure Math 1, 2, 3, and 4 for Input
Source, Math Type, and associated parameters.
Logic Configuration ( Table 6-11) – configure Logic 1, 2, 3, and 4 for Input
Sources, Type, and associated parameters.
Auxiliary Configuration (Table 6-12) – configure Switch 1, Switch 2, Function
Generator 1 and Function Generator 2(for pre-control linearizing of inputs) for
Sources and associated parameters.
PID Control (Option) Configuration (Table 6-13) – configure:
PID 1 and PID 2 Configuration parameters,
Tune (Enable Accutune, Fuzzy Logic, Use Prop Band, Use RPM, configure
Tuning parameters) and
Alarms Parameters (Setpoint types and Values, alarm hysteresis)
Auto Cycling (Table 6-16) – enable Auto Cycle 1 and 2 and set rinse schedule and
associated parameters. Auto cycling provides automated timing, control and
functionality for the cleaning and calibration of input probes.
Variables (Analog Table 6-3 and Digital Table 6-4) selections can be read and
written remotely using Modbus function codes. You are setting up the initial values
for the variables when power is applied to the UDA (Refer to Table 6-18 for an
Example)
Communication Configuration (Table 6-19) – configure IR Front Panel,
Modbus, RS485 and Ethernet.
Maintenance Configuration (Table 6-20) – Configure:
System - read the Software version, configured Language, selected Mains
Frequency, and PID Control Selections, enter a Password, and reset the Unit.
Input 1 and Input 2 - configure Input types, Conductivity units’ type, wire
size, and wire length, and temperature Units.
Display – setup the Main Display Header; and Clear Event and Cal Histories.
Tag Names – configure tag name strings for input names on single channel
main display, Auto Cycle display header, Pharma display header, PID display
header. Alarm names to appear in status and event history.
Clock - set real time clock date; time; date format; and time format.
Tests - run Display and Keyboard tests, read Output levels, and read Relay
States.
54
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
6.4 Basic Configuration Procedure
Introduction
Each of the Set Up groups and their functions are pre-configured at the factory.
If you want to change any of these selections or values, read the “General Rules for
Editing” and follow the procedure in Table 6-1. This procedure tells you the keys to press
to get to any Setup group and any associated parameter prompt.
6.4.1 General Rules for Editing
Selecting a parameter for edit:
• Display the screen containing the parameter.
• Use the
keys to highlight the parameter name.
to highlight the displayed current value.
Enter
• Press
Editing a parameter having a text string as an assigned value:
• Select the parameter as explained above.
• Use the
keys to display other valid choices.
Enter
• When your choice is displayed, press
Editing a parameter having a numeric value
• Select the parameter as explained above.
to select.
• Use the
keys to move the cursor to the digit to be changed.
Moving the cursor left into leading spaces changes space to 0.
Moving the cursor right causes any leading 0 to change to a space.
If you hold down the
to the next highest digit available for the particular parameter. If you hold
down the key, the cursor will move to the right and increment the next
lowest digit available for the particular parameter.
key, the cursor will move to the left and increment
• Use the keys to increment or decrement the numerical value at and to
the left of the digit. Increment/decrement past range limit displays limit
value and causes status message.
Use the
keys to move the cursor to the next digit. Repeat.
Enter
When all digits have been changed, press
to store.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Basic Configuration Procedure
Table 6-1 Basic Configuration Procedure
Step
1
Operation
Press
Result
Enter Set Up
Mode
Setup
Setup
Inputs
Outputs
Relays
Alarms
Monitors
Math
Logic
Auxiliary
PID Control*
Auto Cycling*
Variables
Communication
Maintenance
The Main Menu is displayed.
Use
to scroll and select a setup group (Example –
Inputs). The selection will be highlighted.
2
The Setup group selected is shown at the top of the screen
and will display all the selections within that group.
Enter Set Up
Group
Enter
INPUTS
Input 1 Preph
Input 2 Conduc
Press
to highlight the desired selection.
(Example – Input 1 PRE PH)
3
The list of parameters for that selection will be displayed.
(Example – Input 1 PRE PH)
Enter the
selection
Enter
INPUT 1 PRE PH
PV Type
PV Range
pH Glass
0 - 14
Temp Input
Temp Type
Solu Temp Comp
Solution pH/°C
Enable
O
8550
Custom
0.000
Press
to highlight the desired selection.
4
5
The displayed current value for the parameter is displayed.
Changing a
parameter
Enter
Depending on whether you are changing a text string or a
numerical value, follow the “General Rules for Editing” in
section 6.4.1 to make the changes.
Change the
Value or
Selection
56
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
6
Enters value or selection made into memory after another
key is pressed.
Enter the Value
or Selection
Enter
Repeat the procedure for changing any parameter for any
group.
7
8
Any changes made to a parameter value will revert to the
original value before editing.
To Abort the
Changes Made
Exit
Exit
Until you see the main Setup screen.
Exit Setup Mode
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
6.5 Analog and Digital Signal Sources
Overview
This section contains a list of signals that are available for connection as digital and
analog sources.
Table 6-2 Signal Sources
Signal Type
Applies Source to:
Selections
Alarms (PV)
Outputs
Math Blocks
Auxiliary - Function Generators
Monitor 1 through 4
Auxiliary - Switch (A,B)
Relays (Time Prop, Pulse Freq)
PID (RSP Source, Feedforward
Source)
None
Analog Source Selections
(Table 6-3)
Input 1-2 PV
Input 1-2 Temp
Pharma Out 1-2
Math 1-4
Func Gen 1-2
Switch 1-2
Sum
Difference
Ratio
%Passage
%Rejection
Cation Value
PIDout 1-2
AnlgVar 1-4
PID 1 and 2 PV Source
None
PV Source Selections
Function Generator 1 and 2
Input 1 – 2 PV
Logic (InA, InB)
None
Alarm1-4
Alm Grp 1-2
Monitor 1-4
Logic 1-4
Digital Source Selections
(Table 6-4)
Relays (Digital Out, Pulse out)
Auxiliary - Switch (Select B
Source)
Alarms Disable
PID (Remote setpoint select,
Manual select)
Auto Cycle – Start Source
Digital In 1-2
In 1-2 Fault
In 1-2 Hold
Out 1-3 Fault
Hold
Pharma 1-2 Fail
Pharma 1-2 Warn
PID 1 Alarm 1-2
PID 2 Alarm 1-2
Auto Cycle 1 – Extract, Rinse, Cal PT1,
Cal PT2, Fail
Auto Cycle 2 – Extract, Rinse, Cal PT1,
Cal PT2, Fail
Input 1-2 Cal
Output 1-3 Cal
DgtlVar 1-4
58
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Table 6-3 Analog Signal Sources
Analog Signal
Input 1 PV
Description
Definition
Input 1 Process
Variable
PV Source selection
PV Source selection
Input 2 PV
Input 2 Process
Variable
Input 1 Temp
Input 2 Temp
Pharma Out 1
Input 1 Temperature
Input 2 Temperature
Input 1 Temperature Selection
Input 2 Temperature Selection
Pharmacopoeia
Output 1
Input 1 Pharmacopia 1 Output (for Conductivity) = percent of USP
stage limit
Output = 100 * pv in uScm / USP stage limit
Valid for Conductivity Input
Pharma Out 2
Pharmacopoeia
Output 2
Input 2 Pharmacopia 2 Output = percent of USP stage limit
Output = 100 * pv in uScm / USP stage limit
Valid for Conductivity Input
Math 1
Math 1
Math 2
Math 3
Math 4
Math selections can be connected to any Input PV, secondary
variable (Temperature), or Calculated Value. Math blocks include
scaling for the linear selection only.
Math 2
Math 3
See Table 6-10 for Math Configuration
Math 4
Func Gen 1
Func Gen 2
Function Generator 1 Generates an output characteristic curve based on up to 11
configurable data points for both input (X) and output values (Y).
Function Generator 2
Part of the Auxiliary Configuration group.
See Table 6-12 for Function Generator Configuration
Switch 1
Switch 2
Switch 1
Switch 2
Switch selections have 2 input sources (A and B). A switch block is
used to select between two analog signals. The switch block can be
used for many monitor and control strategies. A Digital Signal Source
when active will select the B input source of the switch as the output.
Part of the Auxiliary Configuration group.
See Table 6-12 for Switch Configuration
Sum*
Input 1 + Input 2
Input 1 – Input 2
Input 1 / Input 2
Difference*
Ratio*
The availability of calculated variables in the list of available sources
for alarms, math and control and for status display is determined by
similarity of units of measure between the two input boards.
%Passage*
Min(Input 1 or 2)
Max(Input 1 or 2)
*100
% Rejection*
(1-Min(Input 1 or 2)/
Max(Input1 or 2))
*100
Cation Value
PID Out 1
pH Value
Calculated pH value from differential conductivity
PID Output 1
PID 1 Output in percent (0 to 100). Normally connected to a
proportional current (Current Type) or time proportional or frequency
proportional relay.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
PID Out 2
PID Output 2
PID 2 Output in percent (0 to 100). Normally connected to a
proportional current (Current Type) or time proportional or frequency
proportional relay.
Anlg Var 1
Anlg Var 2
Anlg Var 3
Anlg Var 4
Analog Variable 1
Analog Variable 2
Analog Variable 3
Analog Variable 4
Initial values of Analog Variable 1 applied at power on.
Initial values of Analog Variable 2 applied at power on.
Initial values of Analog Variable 3 applied at power on.
Initial values of Analog Variable 4 applied at power on.
Table 6-4 Digital Signal Sources
Digital Signal
Alarm 1
Description
Definition
Alarm 1
Any Alarm 1 configuration. See Table 6-8 for Alarm configuration
Any Alarm 2 configuration. See Table 6-8 for Alarm configuration
Any Alarm 2 configuration. See Table 6-8 for Alarm configuration
Any Alarm 4 configuration. See Table 6-8 for Alarm configuration
Any Monitor 1 configuration. See Table 6-9 for Monitor configuration
Alarm 2
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 3
Alarm 4
Alarm 4
Monitor 1
Alarm Group 1
Monitor 1
Alarm Group 1
Is the OR of the Alarm 1 - 4 signals. Will be TRUE when any Alarm 1 -
4 is TRUE.
If a single digital signal is needed to go TRUE for any alarm, OR alarm
group 1 and alarm group 2 together to create a logic signal.
Alarm Group 2
Alarm Group 2
Is the OR of the PID Control alarm signals. Will be TRUE when any
PID Control Alarm is TRUE.
If a single digital signal is needed to go TRUE for any alarm, OR alarm
group 1 and alarm group 2 together to create a logic signal.
Monitor 2
Monitor 3
Monitor 4
Logic 1
Monitor 2
Monitor 3
Monitor 4
Logic 1
Any Monitor 2 configuration. See Table 6-9 for Monitor configuration
Any Monitor 3 configuration. See Table 6-9 for Monitor configuration
Any Monitor 4 configuration. See Table 6-9 for Monitor configuration
Any Logic 1 configuration. See Table 6-11 for Logic configuration
Any Logic 2 configuration. See Table 6-11 for Logic configuration
Any Logic 3 configuration. See Table 6-11 for Logic configuration
Any Logic 4 configuration. See Table 6-11 for Logic configuration
Digital Input 1 signal from Option Board (must be installed)
Logic 2
Logic 2
Logic 3
Logic 3
Logic 4
Logic 4
Digital In 1
Digital In 2
In 1 Hold
In 2 Hold
In 1 Fault
In 2 Fault
Digital Input 1
Digital Input 2
In 1 Hold
In 2 Hold
Input 1 Fault
Input 2 Fault
Digital Input 2 signal from Option Board (must be installed)
Input is in Hold. This condition occurs either by pushing the HOLD
button on the front panel or when an Auto Cycle is being run.
Input open conditions. An input board disconnect while powered results
in an input fault condition and allows an alarm to be triggered.
60
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Out 1 Fault
Out 2 Fault
Out 3 Fault
Hold
Output 1 Fault
Output 2 Fault
Output 3 Fault
Hold
Output open conditions. This allows an alarm to be triggered if the
respective 4-20 mA output opens.
Engages Hold of Analog Inputs
Pharm 1 Warn
Pharmacopoeia 1
Warning
The Pharma 1 Display ( Section 5.8) outputs digital Warning signal
whenever the measured conductivity exceeds the Percent Warning
Value selected in the “Pharma Op Panel” on the Pharma Display
(Stage 1only)
Pharm 1 Fail
Pharmacopoeia 1
Failure
The Pharma 1 Display ( Section 5.8) outputs digital Failure signal
whenever one of the following conditions occur:
Stage 1 – Measured Conductivity exceeds 100%
Stage 1 – Temperature not within range of 0-100 degrees C
Stage 2 – Conductivity is 0.1 µS/cm or greater for 5 minutes
Stage 3 – pH not within range of 5 – 7pH
Stage 2 and 3 – Temperature not within range of 24 – 26 degrees C.
Pharm 2 Warn
Pharm 2 Fail
Pharmacopoeia 2
Warning
The Pharma 2 Display ( Section 5.8) outputs digital Warning signal
whenever the measured conductivity exceeds the Percent Warning
Value selected in the “Pharma Op Panel” on the Pharma Display
(Stage 1only)
Pharmacopoeia 2
Failure
The Pharma 2 Display ( Section 5.8) outputs digital Failure signal
whenever one of the following conditions occur:
Stage 1 – Measured Conductivity exceeds 100%
Stage 1 – Temperature not within range of 0-100 degrees C
Stage 2 – Conductivity is 0.1 µS/cm or greater for 5 minutes
Stage 3 – pH not within range of 5 – 7pH
Stage 2 and 3 – Temperature not within range of 24 – 26 degrees C.
PID 1 Alm 1
PID 1 Alm 2
PID 2 Alm 1
PID 2 Alm 2
AC 1 Extract
PID Control 1 Alarm 1 Control Alarms – See Table 6-15 PID Alarms
PID Control 1 Alarm 2
PID Control 2 Alarm 1
PID Control 2 Alarm 2
Auto Cycle 1 Probe
Extraction
Auto Cycle 1 digital output (Cycle Start Source) configuration selection
See Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration.
AC 1 Rinse
AC1 Cal
Auto Cycle 1 Probe
Rinse
Auto Cycle 1 digital output (Cycle Start Source) configuration selection
See Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration.
Auto Cycle 1
Calibration Point 1
Auto Cycle 1 digital output (Cycle Start Source) configuration selection
See Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration.
AC 1 Cal 2
AC 1 Fail
Auto Cycle 1
Calibration Point 2
Auto Cycle 1 digital output (Cycle Start Source) configuration selection
See Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration.
Auto Cycle 1 Failure
Auto Cycle 1 Failure is active whenever an Auto Cycle 1 failure occurs
Auto Cycle 1digital output (Cycle Start Source) configuration selection
See Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration.
AC 2 Extract
AC 2 Rinse
AC 2 Cal
Auto Cycle 2 Probe
Extraction
Auto Cycle 2 digital output (Cycle Start Source) configuration selection
See Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration.
Auto Cycle 2 Probe
Rinse
Auto Cycle 2 digital output (Cycle Start Source) configuration selection
See Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration.
Auto Cycle 2
Calibration Point 1
Auto Cycle 2 digital output (Cycle Start Source) configuration selection
See Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
AC 2 Cal 2
AC 2 Fail
Auto Cycle 2
Calibration Point 2
Auto Cycle 2 digital output (Cycle Start Source) configuration selection
See Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration.
Auto Cycle 2 Failure
Auto Cycle 2 Failure is active whenever an Auto Cycle 2 failure occurs
Auto Cycle 2 digital output (Cycle Start Source) configuration selection
See Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration.
Input 1 Cal
Input 2 Cal
Output 1 Cal
Input 1 Calibration
Input 2 Calibration
Output 1 Calibration
This signal goes TRUE when the calibration factor for input 1 is being
calculated. The TRUE state is active for less than one second.
This signal goes TRUE when the calibration factor for input 2 is being
calculated. The TRUE state is active for less than one second.
The signal indicates when the Output 1 calibration values are being
changed. The signal goes TRUE when the “4ma Offset” or “20ma
Offset” is being modified. The signal goes FALSE when the value is
entered.
Output 2 Cal
Output 3 Cal
Output 2 Calibration
Output 3 Calibration
The signal indicates when the Output 2 calibration values are being
changed. The signal goes TRUE when the “4ma Offset” or “20ma
Offset” is being modified. The signal goes FALSE when the value is
entered.
The signal indicates when the Output 3 calibration values are being
changed. The signal goes TRUE when the “4ma Offset” or “20ma
Offset” is being modified. The signal goes FALSE when the value is
entered.
DgtlVar 1
DgtlVar 2
DgtlVar 3
DgtlVar 4
Digital Variable 1
Digital Variable 2
Digital Variable 3
Digital Variable 4
Initial values of Digital Variable 1 applied at power on.
Initial values of Digital Variable 2 applied at power on.
Initial values of Digital Variable 3 applied at power on.
Initial values of Digital Variable 4 applied at power on.
62
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
6.6 Inputs Configuration
Overview
This group lets you select pH/ORP, Preamp pH, Conductivity, or Dissolved Oxygen
Input type and the associated output parameters.
Accessing Inputs Menu
Setup
Press
Use the
to display the Main menu.
Enter
keys to select “Inputs” then press
to enter the sub-menus.
Input 1 and Input 2 – Direct pH/ORP, Preamp pH, Conductivity, or Dissolved Oxygen
are available for selection. Select PV type, read the range, select Temp Type, Solution
Temp Compensation, Bias, Failsafe and Filter Time.
For Dissolved Oxygen, also select the Salinity type and Pressure type.
Enter
Press
to highlight the desired menu selection then press
to display the group of
parameters.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – ”General Rules for Editing”.
Table 6-5 Input Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or
Range of
Setting
Parameter Definition
PV Type
pH Glass
pH HPW
pH Durafet
(default)
ORP
The PV type determines the numerical format and the
units of measure on the online PV display. Measured
PV is generally displayed in the highest decimal
precision possible to .001 and has a potentially
displayable range of 0.000 to 99999. The exceptions
are dissolved oxygen, pH, ORP and temperature,
which are displayed with fixed decimal precision. PV
Type determines specific ranges.
Input 1 or 2
Direct pH
ORP
PV Range
0.0 to 14.0 pH
Read Only
-1600 to 1600
ORP
Temp Input
(ORP only)
Enable
Disable
Enable to allow “Temp Type” selection – see below.
Temp Type
8550Ω Therm
(default)
8550Ω Thermistor
1000Ω RTD
Manual
1000Ω Resistance Temperature Detector
Manual
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or
Range of
Setting
Parameter Definition
Temp Deg F or C 14.0 to 230.0ºF Temp Deg F or C will appear depending on what
(Temp Type =
Manual)
Temperature Unit was selected in “Maintenance”
setup group, parameter “Temp Units”.
default = 77ºF
-10 to 110ºC
default = 25ºC
Solu Temp Comp
(Not ORP)
None (default)
Custom
H20
Enter “Solution pH/ºC” value
Pure Water
Ammonia
NH3
Phosphate
Morpholine
Phosphate
Morpholine
Solution pH/ºC
Measured pH is displayed and transmitted normalized
to a solution temperature of 25°C as determined by
the current Solution Temperature Coefficient. This is
expressed in units of pH/°C with precision to the
hundredths decimal place. The parameter “Solu Temp
Coeff” allows the selection of the following entries.
Follow the “General Rules for Editing” in section
6.4.1 to make the changes. (-) Will appear when first
digit to the right of decimal point is changed.
0.000 (default)
to
-0.050
(Solu Temp
Comp = Custom)
(Not ORP)
Solution Type
None (Default)
H2O (Pure Water)
NH3 (Ammonia)
PO4 (Phosphate)
C4H9NO (Morpholine)
Custom
Temp Coefficient
0.000
-0.016
-0.032
-0.032
-0.032
User Entry
PV Bias
-99999 to
99999
PV Bias Constant - is used to compensate the input
for drift of an input value.
default = 0.00
Failsafe
-99999 to
99999
The output value to which the output will go to protect
against the effects of failure of the equipment.
default = 14.00
Filter Time
0 to 120
default = 0
A software digital filter is provided for dampening the
process noise. This filter is applied before the limit
functions.
64
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or
Range of
Setting
Parameter Definition
The pH Preamp input card measures pH and accepts inputs from a Durafet series Preamp, a
glass Meredian II Preamp or a Durafet series Cap Adapter. The pH Preamp input is similar to
the pH/ORP input shown previously and has an identical Setup/Inputs parameter menu with
the following important differences:
Input 1 or 2
Preamp pH
No ORP measurement. ORP is not selectable as a PV Type in Setup/Inputs.
No HPW measurement. HPW is not selectable as a PV Type in Setup/Inputs.
The parameter “Temperature Input” is available for either Durafet or Glass PV type to enable
or disable. A temperature input disable accommodates preamps that do not transmit
measured temperature from the probe. This will disable all monitored temperature values,
temperature input diagnostics and faults and the parameter “Solution Temp Comp” under
Setup/Inputs/pH Preamp n.
You need to disable “Temperature Input” for Durafet from External Preamp.
PV Type
pH Glass
pH HPW
pH Durafet
(default)
The PV type determines the numerical format and the
units of measure on the online PV display. Measured
PV is generally displayed with fixed decimal precision.
PV Range
0.0 to 14.0 pH
Read Only
Temp Input
Enable
Disable
(default)
Enable to allow “Temp Type” selection – see below.
Temp Type
8550Ω Therm
(default)
1000Ω RTD
Manual
8550Ω Thermistor
(Temp Input =
Enable)
1000Ω Resistance Temperature Detector
Manual
Temp Deg F or C 14.0 to 230.0ºF Temp Deg F or C will appear depending on what
(Temp Input =
Enable, Temp
Type = Manual)
Temperature Unit was selected in “Maintenance”
setup group, parameter “Temp Units”.
default = 77ºF
-10 to 110ºC
default = 25ºC
Solu Temp Comp
None (default)
Custom
H20
Enter “Solution pH/ºC” value
Pure Water
Ammonia
(Temp Input =
Enable)
NH3
Phosphate
Morpholine
Phosphate
Morpholine
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or
Range of
Setting
Parameter Definition
Solution pH/ºC
Measured pH is displayed and transmitted normalized
to a solution temperature of 25°C as determined by
the current Solution Temperature Coefficient. This is
expressed in units of pH/°C with precision to the
hundredths decimal place. The parameter “Solu Temp
Coeff” allows the selection of the following entries.
Follow the “General Rules for Editing” in section
6.4.1 to make the changes. (-) Will appear when first
digit to the right of decimal point is changed.
0.0 (default) to
-0.050 pH/ºC
(Temp Input =
Enable, Solu
Temp Comp =
Custom)
Solution Type
None (Default)
H2O (Pure Water)
NH3 (Ammonia)
PO4 (Phosphate)
C4H9NO (Morpholine)
Custom
Temp Coefficient
0.000
-0.016
-0.032
-0.032
-0.032
User Entry
PV Bias
-99999.00 to
99999.00
PV Bias Constant - is used to compensate the input
for drift of an input value.
default = 0.00
Failsafe
-99999.00 to
99999.00
The output value to which the output will go to protect
against the effects of failure of the equipment.
default = 14.00
Filter Time
0 to 120
default = 0.0
A software digital filter is provided for dampening the
process noise. This filter is applied before the limit
functions.
66
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or
Range of
Setting
Parameter Definition
For every cell constant the PV type includes selections for both conductivity µS/cm and
conductivity mS/cm.
Input 1 or
Input 2
Conductivity µS/cm displays µS/cm and provides standard range solution type selections:
None, NaCl, Morpholine, HCL, Acid, and NH3.
Conductivity
Conductivity mS/cm displays mS/cm and provides wide range solution type selections: None,
HCl, NaCl, H2SO4, and NaOH.
Upper range limit defaults according to the table below:
For every cell constant the PV type also includes selections for either TDS ppb/TDS ppm or
TDS ppm/TDS ppt.:
TDS ppb/ppm provides standard or wide solution type selections and
TDS ppm/ppt provides standard or wide solution type selections. Solution selections are the
same as above with the exception of None.
Upper range limit defaults according to the table below:
Cell Const 0.01
Cell Const 0. 1
Cell Const 1
Cell Const 10
Cell Const 25
Cell Const 50
0 - 2 µS/cm
displayable to 200 displayable to
µS/cm
0 - 20 µS/cm
0 - 200 µS/cm
displayable to
20000 µS/cm
0 - 2000
µS/cm
displayable to
99999 µS/cm
0 - 20000
µS/cm
displayable to
99999 µS/cm
0 - 20000
µS/cm
displayable to
99999 µS/cm
2000 µS/cm
0 - 0.2 mS/cm
0 - 2000 ppb TDS
0 - 200 ppm TDS
0 - 2 mS/cm
0 - 20 mS/cm
0 - 200 mS/cm 0 - 500 mS/cm
0 - 1000
mS/cm
0 - 20000 ppb
TDS
0 - 200 ppm
TDS
0 - 2000 ppm
TDS
0 - 10 % conc
displayable to
20%
0 - 20 % conc
0 - 2000 ppm TDS 0 - 20 ppt TDS
0 - 200 ppt
TDS
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or
Range of
Setting
Parameter Definition
PV Type
These selections are only available with regard to the
Cell Constant selected (See “Cell Constant”).
Cond μS/cm
(NIST-default)+
Cond mS/cm –
(NIST)
Concentrtn
TDS ppb
TDS ppm
TDS ppt
Resistivity
Select Cell
Constant First
Cell
Constant
Available Selectable PV Types
Use the keys to select
0.01
Conductance μS/cm (default- NIST), Conductance
mS/cm (NIST), Conductance mS/m(default - ISO),
Conductance S/m (ISO), TDS ppb, TDS ppm,
Resistivity, Conductance μS/m (ISO)
0.1
(Default)
Conductance μS/cm (default- NIST), Conductance
mS/cm (NIST), Conductance mS/m(default - ISO),
Conductance S/m (ISO), TDS ppb, TDS ppm,
Resistivity, Conductance μS/m (ISO)
Cond mS/m
(ISO-Default)+
Cond S/m –
(ISO)
Concentrtn
TDS ppb
1
Conductance μS/cm (default- NIST), Conductance
mS/cm (NIST), Conductance mS/m(default - ISO),
Conductance S/m (ISO), TDS ppm, TDS ppt,
TDS ppm
TDS ppt
Resistivity
10
25
Conductance μS/cm (default- NIST), Conductance
mS/cm (NIST), Conductance mS/m(default - ISO),
Conductance S/m (ISO), TDS ppm, TDS ppt.
Cond μS/m
Concentration (default), Conductance μS/cm
(default- NIST), Conductance mS/cm (NIST),
Conductance mS/m(default - ISO), Conductance
S/m (ISO),
+ parameter
selected in
MAINTENANCE
Æ INPUTS menu
50
Concentration (default), Conductance μS/cm
(default- NIST), Conductance mS/cm (NIST),
Conductance mS/m(default - ISO), Conductance
S/m (ISO),
PV Range
Read Only
Cell Constant *
0.01
0.1 (default)
The Cell Constant is a value specific to a category of
cells for the measurement range required.
1
10
25
50
Cal Factor *
0.850 to 1.150
default = 1.000
The Cal Factor is a correction value applied to the
cell’s Cell Constant, which is unique to each cell to
take into account tolerances in manufacture.
If a standard cell is attached to the sensor, the Cell
Constant defaults to “0.1” and the Cal Factor
defaults to “1.000”. These standard cell parameter
values are editable and are retained through a
power cycle.
*Cell Constant and Cal Factor are automatically uploaded from Honeywell conductivity cells
with EEPROM (blue & brown leads) and these values cannot be edited.
68
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or
Range of
Setting
Parameter Definition
TDS Factor
(only PV Type
TDS)
0.010
1.000(default)
2.000
The TDS Factor is a conversion value applied to
conductivity to derive total dissolved solids, in units of
ppm per μS/cm.
Temp Type
8550Ω Therm
(default)
8550Ω Thermistor
1000Ω RTD
Manual
1000Ω Resistance Temperature Detector
Manual
Temp Deg C or F -10.0 to
140.0ºC
If “Manual” is selected at “Temp Type” -Temp Deg F
or C will appear depending on what Temperature Unit
was selected in “Maintenance” setup group,
parameter “Temp Units”.
14 to 284ºF
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or
Range of
Setting
Parameter Definition
Solu Temp Comp None
Custom
Measured Conductivity and Resistivity can optionally
be temperature compensated to 25°C for a specific
solution type. TDS and concentration are always
measured based on a specific solution type. The cell
constant and measurement type determines which
solution types are available for selection, according to
the table below:
H20
NH3
PO4
C4H9NO
HCl
NaCl (default)
H2SO4
NaOH
Cell
Constant
Available Selectable Solution Types
Use the keys to select
0.01
None (Conductivity/Resistivity only),
NaCl (μS/cm, mS/cm, TDS ppb, TDS ppm ),
NH (μS/cm, TDS ppb, TDS ppm ),
3
C4H9NO (μS/cm, TDS ppb, TDS ppm ),
H2SO4;HCL;NaOH (mS/cm)
0.1
None (Conductivity/Resistivity only),
(Default)
NaCl(μS/cm, mS/cm, TDS ppb, TDS ppm ),
NH (μS/cm, TDS ppb, TDS ppm ),
3
C4H9NO (μS/cm, TDS ppb, TDS ppm ),
H2SO4;HCL;NaOH (mS/cm)
1
None (Conductivity only),
NaCl (μS/cm, mS/cm, TDS ppm, TDS ppt ),
NH (μS/cm, TDS ppm ),
3
C H NO (μS/cm, TDS ppm ),
4
9
H2SO ;HCL;NaOH (mS/cm, TDS ppt)
4
10
None (Conductivity only),
NaCl (μS/cm, mS/cm, TDS ppm, TDS ppt ),
NH (μS/cm, TDS ppm ),
3
C H NO (μS/cm, TDS ppm ),
4
9
H SO ;HCL;NaOH (mS/cm, TDS ppt)
2
4
25
50
None (Conductivity only),
HCl (mS/cm, Concentration),
NaCl (μS/cm, mS/cm, Concentration),
H2SO (mS/cm, Concentration),
4
NaOH (mS/cm, Concentration)
None (Conductivity only),
HCl (mS/cm, Concentration),
NaCl (μS/cm, mS/cm, Concentration),
H2SO (mS/cm, Concentration),
4
NaOH (mS/cm, Concentration)
Wire Len Feet +
0 to 1000 ft
default = 0
Refer to appendix 15.2 to enter values for lead wire
resistance compensation
Wire Len Meters + 0 to 304.80
default = 0
70
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or
Range of
Setting
Parameter Definition
Wire Size AWG +
16 AWG
18
AWG(default)
20 AWG
22 AWG
Wire Size Sq mm +
Pharma Type
0.33 to 2.08
default = 0.82
None
PhEur
USP
PhEur - Pharmacopoeia Europa
USP - United States Pharmacopoeia
standard procedure stages for determining Purified
Water
default = None
Pharma PV High
-99999.00 to
99999.00
(default
Pharma PV High Value – Measured solution
conductivity value scaled for 100%
10.000)
Pharma PV Low
Pharm Tmr Mins
-99999.00 to
99999.00
(default 0.000)
Pharma PV Low Value - Measured solution
conductivity value scaled for 0%
000.0 to 120.0
(default
10.000)
Pharma Timer Minutes - If the Pharma sample does
not pass the Stage 1 conductivity requirement a Fail
signal is generated, then the State 2 and Stage 3
tests are conducted. When the Stage 2 or Stage 3 test
is successful, the fail signal is cancelled and the
Pharma Timer begins to count down from the
configured minutes value set here. When the Timer
countdown is completed, the Pharma function block
returns to Stage 1.
PV Bias
-9999.00 to
9999.00
PV Bias Constant - is used to compensate the input
for drift of an input value.
default = 0.000
Failsafe
0.0 to 2000
default =
2000.000
The output value to which the output will go to protect
against the effects of failure of the equipment.
Filter Time
0 to 120.0
default = 0.000
A software digital filter is provided for dampening the
process noise and is applied before the limit functions.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or
Range of
Setting
Parameter Definition
PV Type
DO% Sat
The concentration of oxygen dissolved in water (or
other liquid) may be described by either “dissolved
oxygen (DO) concentration” or percent saturation.
The units for DO are either parts per million - PPM
(equivalent to milligrams per liter) or parts per billion -
PPB (equivalent to micrograms per liter). The units of
saturation are percent where 100% saturation is
equivalent to the concentration of oxygen dissolved in
air-saturated water. For instance, at 25°C and one
atmosphere pressure, 8.24 ppm = 100% saturation.
Although the ppm and ppb concentration units are the
most frequently used units by far, % saturation may
be appropriate for non-aqueous liquids like vegetable
oil.
Input 1 or
Input 2
DO
DO Concen
(default)
Dissolved
Oxygen
PV Range
0 – 200 ppb,
displayable to
20000ppb
Read Only
0-20 ppm
0 – 100% sat,
displayable to
200% sat
Temp Type
5000Ω Therm
Default
5000Ω Thermistor
1000Ω RTD
Manual
1000Ω Resistance Temperature Detector
Manual
Temp Deg C or F 0 to 60ºC
(Temp Type =
Temp Deg F or C will appear depending on what
Temperature Unit was selected in “Maintenance”
setup group, parameter “Temp Units”.
32 to 140ºF
Manual)
Salinity Type
Salinity is used to correct for salt in the process water.
Manual
Manual
(default)
Valid only if conductivity board is present.
(parts per thousand) as sodium chloride
0.0 = No selection
Conduc Input
Salinity ppt
0.00 to
40.00ppt
“Manual” Salinity
type only
default = 0.00
Pressure Type
Manual
Allows manual entry of atmospheric pressure
compensation
Internal sensor for atmospheric pressure
compensation during air calibration
Sensor
(default)
Pressure mm Hg 500.0 to 800.0
Atmospheric pressure compensation.
Enter a value in mmHg.
(Manual Pressure
type only)
default = 760
mmHg
72
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or
Range of
Setting
Parameter Definition
PV Bias
PV Bias Constant - is used to compensate the input
for drift of an input value.
-20.00 to 20.00 If PPM Board is installed.
PPM
-20000 to
If PPB Board is installed.
20000 PPB
default = 0.000
Failsafe
The output value to which the output will go to protect
against the effects of failure of the equipment.
0.000 to 20.00
PPM
If PPM Board is installed.
0.000 to 20000 If PPB Board is installed.
PPB
default =
20.000
Filter Time
0 to 120.0
A software digital filter is provided for dampening the
process. The units are in time constant seconds.
default = 0.0
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
6.7 Outputs Configuration
Overview
This group lets you select the signal that will be transmitted.
Accessing Outputs Menu
Setup
• Press
to display the Main menu.
Enter
• Use the
keys to select “Outputs” then press
to enter the sub-menu.
• Output 1, Output 2, or Output 3 and their associated parameters are available
for selection.
Enter
• Press
to highlight the desired menu selection then press
group of parameters.
to display the
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 - General Rules for Editing”.
Table 6-6 Outputs Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or Range
of Setting
Parameter Definition
Any Analog Signal
See Table 6-3
Source
Process Variable Source - Selects the signal
that will be transmitted.
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
See Note 1 for units.
High Range
Low Range
Slew Time
-99999.00 to 99999.00 High Range Value - value of input that
corresponds to 100 % output value.
See Note 1 for units.
-99999.00 to 99999.00 Low Range Value - value of input that
corresponds to 0 % output value.
See Note 1 for units.
0.000 to 999.00
in seconds
default = 0.000
Slew Time is the maximum rate of change
required to drive the output from full OFF (0% -
typically 4 mA) to full ON (100% - typically
20mA).
mA Range High
mA Range Low
mA Limit High
mA Limit Low
0 to 20
default = 20
Value of mA output that corresponds to 100 %
output signal (for example: 20 mA).
0 to 20
default = 4
Value of mA output that corresponds to 0 %
output signal (for example: 4 mA).
0 to 21
default = 21
Value of mA that you want to set the High
Range Limit.
0 to 21
default = 3
Value of mA that you want to set the Low
Range Limit.
74
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
NOTE 1.
The entries for any parameter are in the units of that parameter.
For example:
Parameters in engineering units.
Input 1 PV
Input 1 Temp
Input 2 PV
Input 2 Temp
Pharma Out 1
Pharma Out 2
Parameters in %
Control 1
Control 2
Math 1,2,3,4
Output 1,2,3
So in the SETUP OUTPUT menu, for the SOURCE and Hi Range and Low Range
values, these look at the units of that source.
If retransmitting a pH input, the Hi Range and Low Range values would normally be set
to 14 pH and 0 pH. (14 pH= 100% output, and 0 pH = 0% output.)
But if the output is to go to a valve, to open the valve or operate a pump through a range
of 0-100% open, and has a SOURCE of CONTROL 1, then the units of the
CONTROL 1 output is in units of %, so in the SETUP OUTPUT menu, the High Range
and Low Range would be in % units.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
6.8 Relays Configuration
Overview
Programming the relays consists of selecting the relay type, identifying the input
parameter, which activates the relay and selecting whether the relay is energized when
the input parameter is on or off. The Relay group lets you select a relay type for up to
four relays. When planning relay operation, it is wise to consider the state of the relay
when power is not applied to the UDA. The invert parameter of the relay configuration is
helpful in assuring that the Off device state is consistent with the relay normal operation.
Each relay output can be independently configured to be one of four basic types:
A Digital Output Relay allows connection to any Alarm, Alarm Group, Monitor, Logic,
Digital Input, Input Fault, Output Fault, Hold Key, Pharm Warn, Pharm Fail, Control
Alarms, Input 1 and 2 Rinse and Cal Pts, Cycle on or fail.
Time proportional output is a form of a process variable transmitter or control output
that pulses the relay as a pulse width modulated signal that is proportional to the input
signal over a configured input range. The Time Proportional cycle time is configurable
between 0.1 and 999 seconds while the duty cycle is directly proportional to the selected
input signal.
Frequency proportional output is a form of a process variable transmitter or control
output that pulses the relay as a pulse rate that is proportional to the input signal over a
configured input range. The maximum frequency is set by the cycle time that is
configurable between 0.1 and 999 seconds. The pulse duration is fixed and configured in
seconds by an on time parameter.
On / Off output relay turns On when the input is greater than the high and low ranges
and turns off when the input is less than the high and low ranges. This allows an on / off
control action with an adjustable dead band. The On state is controlled by a cycle time
and on duration parameters such to achieve a selectable output proportion. An invert
parameter is available to allow inverse action such that the relay will cycle ON when
below the low range limit.
Pulse Output relay will provide a fixed duty cycle when the applied input signal is ON.
The cycle time and pulse duration are configurable parameters. The relay will be OFF
when the applied input is OFF. An inverse parameter allows the input to be inverted for
reverse behavior.
Accessing Relays Menu
Setup
• Press
to display the Main menu.
Enter
• Use the
keys to select “Relays” then press
to enter the sub-menu.
• Relay 1, Relay 2, Relay 3 or Relay 4 and their associated parameters are
available for selection.
76
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Enter
• Press
to highlight the desired menu selection then press
group of parameters.
to display the
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – “General Rules for Editing”.
Table 6-7 Relays Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Type
Selection or Range
of Setting
Parameter Definition
Digital Output Relay (default)
Relay Types
Digital Out
Time Prop
Freq Prop
On/Off
Time Proportional Output Relay
Frequency Proportional Output
On / Off control relay
Set relay
types first
Pulse Output
Pulse Out
Relay 1
Relay 2
Relay 3
Relay 4
A Digital Output Relay allows connection to any Alarm, Control Alarm, Logic, Alarm Event,
Hold, Input or Output Fault, or Digital Input.
Any Digital Signal
See Table 6-4
Source
Digital Source
Digital Output
Relay
Invert
Enable
Disable (default)
Inverts the input state of the applied digital input
such that inverse relay operation is achieved
Relay 1
Relay 2
Relay 3
Relay 4
Time proportional output is a form of a process variable transmitter or control output that
pulses the relay as a pulse width modulated signal that is proportional to the input signal over
a configured input range. The Time Proportional cycle time is configurable between 0.1 and
999 seconds while the duty cycle is directly proportional to the selected input signal.
Any Analog Signal
See Table 6-3
Source
PV Source
Time
Proportional
Output Relay High Range
-99999 to 99999
default = 100.00
The high range is the PV based engineering unit
value configured as the value that will produce a
100 percent (always active) duty cycle.
Low Range
-99999 to 99999
default = 0.00
The low range is the PV based engineering unit
value configured as the value that will produce a
0 percent (always inactive) duty cycle.
Invert
Enable
Disable (default)
Inverts the proportional range of the applied
analog input such that inverse relay operation is
achieved.
Cycle Time
Min Off Time
Min On Time
0 to 999 seconds
default = 10
Cycle time is that time period, in seconds, the
relay will be activated.
0 to 15
default = 0
Minimum off is that time period, in seconds, the
relay will be activated.
0 to 15
default = 0
Minimum On is that time period, in seconds, the
relay will be activated.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or Range
of Setting
Parameter Definition
Relay 1
Relay 2
Relay 3
Relay 4
Frequency proportional output is a form of a process variable transmitter or control output
that pulses the relay as a pulse rate that is proportional to the input signal over a configured
relay range. The maximum frequency is set by the cycle time that is configurable between
0.1 and 999 seconds. The pulse duration is fixed and configured in seconds by an on time
parameter.
Frequency
Proportional
Output Relay
Any Analog Signal
See Table 6-3
Source
PV Source
High Range
-99999 to 99999
default = 100.00
The high range is the PV based engineering unit
value configured as the value that will produce a
100 percent (Maximum Frequency) duty cycle.
Low Range
Invert
-99999 to 99999
default = 0.00
The low range is the PV based engineering unit
value configured as the value that will produce a
0 percent (always inactive) duty cycle.
Enable
Disable (default)
Inverts the proportional range of the applied
analog input such that inverse relay operation is
achieved.
Cycle Time
0 to 999
default = 10
Sets the Cycle Time of the maximum output
frequency.
Max Freq=1/Cycle Time
Freq Output = Max Freq * (% Input/100)
For example:
Freq Output (100%)=Max Freq * 1
Freq Ouput (50%)= Max Freq * .5
Freq Ouput (25%)=Max Freq * .25
On Time
0.0 to 999
default = 5
Sets the pulse duration. This value should be
less than the cycle time for proper operation.
Typically this value is used to control the pulse
duration for the finial output control element.
78
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or Range
of Setting
Parameter Definition
Relay 1
On / Off output relay turns On when the input is greater than the relay high and low ranges
and turns off when the input is less than the relay high and low ranges. This allows an on /
off control action with an adjustable dead band. The On state is controlled by a cycle time
and on duration parameters such to achieve a selectable output proportion. An invert
parameter is available to allow inverse action such that the relay will cycle ON when below
the low range limit.
Relay 2
Relay 3
Relay 4
ON/OFF
Control Relay
Any Analog Signal
See Table 6-3
Source
PV Source
High Range
-99999 to 99999
default = 100.00
The high range is the PV based engineering unit
value configured as the value that will produce a
100 percent (Maximum Frequency) duty cycle.
Low Range
Invert
-99999 to 99999
default = 0.00
The low range is the PV based engineering unit
value configured as the value that will produce a
0 percent (always inactive) duty cycle.
Enable
Disable (default)
Inverts the proportional range or input state of
the applied digital or analog input such that
inverse relay operation is achieved.
Cycle Time
On Time
0 to 999
default = 10
Cycle time is that time period, in seconds,
between relay activations.
0,0 to 999
default = 5
Sets the pulse duration. This value should be
less than the cycle time for proper operation.
Typically this value is used to control the pulse
duration for the finial output control element.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or Range
of Setting
Parameter Definition
Relay 1
Relay 2
Relay 3
Relay 4
Pulse Output relay will provide a fixed duty cycle when the applied input signal is ON. The
cycle time and pulse duration are configurable parameters. The relay will be OFF when the
applied input is OFF. An inverse parameter allows the input to be inverted for reverse
behavior.
Any Digital Signal
See Table 6-4
Source
PV Source
Pulse Output
Control Relay
Invert
Enable
Disable (default)
The digital output relays "invert" parameter can
be used to allow direct (invert disabled) or
reverse (invert enabled) control actuation.
Cycle Time
On Time
0 to 999
default = 10.0
Cycle time is that time period, in seconds,
between relay activations.
0 to 999
default = 5.0
The time in seconds that the relay is On during each
cycle when the input to the Pulse Output is ON. When
the Input to the Pulse output is OFF the relay is not
activated.
80
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
6.9 Alarms Configuration
Overview
Alarm 1 through 4
Alarm selections can be connected to any Analog Signal (Table 6-3 Analog Signal
Sources). Each alarm supports a setpoint type and value.
Alarm selections generate front panel alerts, support latching/acknowledge, with on delay
timers. Select any Digital signal (Table 6-4 Digital Signal Sources) to disable the Alarm
Example: Using Math, Switch and Monitor blocks to achieve auto range functions
This example shows how to use the math blocks to scale the output in multiple ranges
and uses a monitor and switch to select the desired amplification for the input. A relay is
connected in parallel to the switch to provide an indication as to which range is currently
being transmitted.
Range Switch using Math, Monitor, and Switch Blocks
Math 1
X
Switch 1
InA
InB
SW
(x – low range) \
(high range – low
Output 1
Math 2
(x – low range) \
(high range – low
Relay 1
Monitor 1
High, SP = V
Output 1
100
Monitor 1
Hysterisis
0
x
Math 2
Low
Range
Math 1
Low
Range
Monitor 1 Math 1
SP High
High Range
Math 2
High
Range
Relay 1
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Accessing Alarms Menu
Setup
• Press
• Use the
• Press
to display the Main menu.
keys to select “Alarms” then press
Enter
to enter the sub-menu.
Enter
to highlight the desired menu selection then press
to display the
group of parameters.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – “General Rules for Editing”.
Table 6-8 Alarms Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or
Range of Setting
Parameter Definition
Any Analog Signal
See Table 6-3
Source
Process Variable Source – Process Variable to be
monitored by the alarm.
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 4
Any Digital Signal
See Table 6-4
Disable
Type
Select any Digital signal to disable the Alarm
Alarm actions may be High or Low.
High (default)
Low
Setpoint Value
-99999 to 99999.9 Setpoint value in engineering units
in Engineering
Units
default = 0.000
Latch
When enabled, the alarm is latch ON until
acknowledged from the Alarm Status display.
Disable (default)
Enable
Hysteresis
0.0 to 99999.9 in
engineering units
default = 0.000
Hysteresis - A user-specified hysteresis value in
the engineering units of the process variable
source is provided. Hysteresis in engineering
units can be set from 0 to the input span of the
monitored variable.
On Delay
0 to 120 seconds
default = 0.000
An on-delay time value up to 120 seconds is
available to prevent momentary alarm actions.
Number of seconds the alarm is active before
activating the Output.
82
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
6.10Monitors Configuration
Overview
Monitor 1, 2, 3, and 4
A Monitor Block is used to determine when a process value is greater or less than a
specified setpoint. Monitor blocks can be used for ON/OFF type control or, in
conjunction with switch and math blocks to change process gain based upon control
regions. The Monitor block provides a hysteresis value limit output transitions near the
set point value. The Monitor block can be configured as either a High or Low Monitor
type. There are four monitor blocks provided for general use.
Unlike Alarms, Monitor blocks do not create an event in the event history, nor do they
cause a status message to appear on the display.
Accessing Monitors Menu
Setup
• Press
• Use the
• Press
to display the Main menu.
Enter
keys to select “Monitors” then press
to enter the sub-menu.
Enter
to highlight the desired Monitor selection then press
to display
the group of parameters.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – “General Rules for Editing”.
Table 6-9 Monitors Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or
Range of Setting
Parameter Definition
Monitor Type
Alarm actions may be High or Low.
(See NOTE 2 on next page)
Monitor 1
Monitor 2
Monitor 3
Monitor 4
High (default)
Low
Any Analog Signal
See Table 6-3
Source
Analog Signal Source – Process signal to be
monitored by the Alarm. Any analog source such
as PV, Temperature, Pharma, Math, Function
Generator, Switch, PID, or Calculated Values*
* units of measure between the two input boards must
be similar
Setpoint Value
Hysteresis
0 to 99999.9 in
Setpoint Value in Engineering Units used for
Engineering Units activation of the output based upon the monitor
default = 0.000
type
0.0 to 99999.9 in
engineering units
default = 0.000
Hysteresis - A user-specified hysteresis value in
the engineering units of the process variable
source is provided. Hysteresis in engineering
units can be set from 0 to the input span of the
monitored variable.
On Delay
0 to 999 seconds
default = 0.0
An on-delay time value up to 999 seconds is
available to prevent momentary alarm actions.
Number of seconds the alarm is active before
activating the Output.
See Notes on next page
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
NOTE 2: For High Monitor
If Input greater than setpoint Output = ON
else if Input less than set point – hysteresis, Output = OFF
else Output is unchanged
For Low Monitor
If Input less than setpoint Output = ON
else if Input greater than set point + hysteresis, Output = OFF
else Output is unchanged
84
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
6.11Math Configuration
Overview
The Math group has four Math selections (Math 1, Math 2, Math 3, and Math 4). Math
selections can be connected to any Analog Signal source (Table 6-3). Math blocks
include scaling for the linear selection only.
The Math Block can also be used for proportional control over the math blocks
configured range for control of any Input PV, Temperature, or calculated values by
connecting it to a current output, TPO relay, or FPO relay. Since multiple outputs can
share a common math block, the output range of a math block can be split over multiple
outputs or relays with each output or proportional relay using a specific portion of the %
output range of the math block.
Accessing Math Menu
Setup
• Press
to display the Main menu.
Enter
• Use the
• Press
keys to select “Math” then press
to enter the sub-menu.
Enter
to highlight the desired menu selection then press
to display the
group of parameters.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – “General Rules for Editing”.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
Table 6-10 Math Configuration
Parameter
Selection or
Range of
Setting
Parameter Definition
Linear (default)
Type
Provide a linear output with Gain and Offset with digital
filtering.
Math 1
Math 2
Math 3
Math 4
Output = Filter (Gain * (Input) + Offset)
Linear is simple linear scale used to retransmit the PV
using the High Range as scaled 100% output and the
Low Range is the scaled to 0% output. There is no
restriction on the High and Low ranges. Setting the
high range to a value less than the low range will invert
the action of the math output. Limit out has no effect on
the output.
Log
Log (base 10):
Output = Log(Input): Input > 10^-10
Output = -10 Input <= 10^-10 Output Block Low
Range=Log(Input low value)
Sq Root
Square Root:
Output = SqRoot(Input). Input > 0
Output = 0 Input < 0
Abs Value
Absolute Value
If Input >= 0 then Output = Input
If Input < 0 then Output = -Input
Any Analog Signal
See Table 6-3
Analog Signal Source – Process signal to be monitored
by the Alarm. Any analog source such as PV,
Temperature, Pharma, Math, Function Generator,
Switch, PID, or Calculated Values*
* units of measure between the two input boards must be
similar
-99999 to
99999.9 in
For Linear Math Types. Gain multiplier for Calculation
Output = Gain * Input + Offset
Source
Engineering Units
default = 1.000
Gain
-99999 to
(Linear Only)
99999.9 in
Engineering Units
default = 0.000
For Linear Math Types. Offset for Calculation
Output = Gain * Input + Offset
Offset
-99999 to
99999.9 in
Engineering Units
default = 0.000
(Linear Only)
Filter Time
0 to 120
default = 0.0
A software digital filter is provided for dampening the
process noise and is applied before the limit functions.
The units are in time constant seconds.
86
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
6.12 Logic Configuration
Overview
The Logic group has four selections (Logic1, Logic 2, Logic 3, and Logic 4). Logic
selections have 2 input sources (A and B) and a selection for the Logic Type – “AND”,
OR”, or LATCH.
The sources can be any Digital Signal Source (Table 6-4).
Accessing Logic Menu
Setup
• Press
to display the Main menu.
Enter
• Use the
• Press
keys to select “Logic” then press
to enter the sub-menu.
Enter
to highlight the desired menu selection then press
to display the
group of parameters.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – “General Rules for Editing”.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Table 6-11 Logic Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Type
Selection or Range
of Setting
Parameter Definition
None
Logic 1
Logic 2
Logic 3
Logic 4
None (default)
AND
AND -Turns digital output ON when input IN A
Source and IN B Source are ON. Thus,
If all inputs are ON, then: OUT = ON.
If any input is OFF, then: OUT = OFF.
OR - Monitors Input A Source and Input B
OR
Source to set state of digital output signal.
Note: User must set
to “OR” if only one
input source is being
used.
If A = OFF and B = OFF, then OUT = OFF.
If A = ON and/or B = ON, then: OUT = ON.
LATCH
LATCH – Sets and Resets Latch state of the
Output.
If A=ON, B=OFF The Output is Latched ON.
If A=OFF, B=ON, The Output is Latched OFF.
If A and B are ON the Output = ON
If A and B are OFF the Output = Latch State.
Power On considerations. The output state of the
latch is cleared on power on.
In A Source
In B Source
Input A logic source selections, and Input B logic
source selections
Any Digital Signal
See Table 6-4
Invert
You can invert Input A or Input B or both. If the
input is inverted, an input line that is ON is seen
as OFF
None (default)
IN A
IN B
In A and B
On Delay
0 to 120 seconds
default = 0.0
An on-delay time value up to 120 seconds is
available to prevent momentary logic gate output
actions. Number of seconds the logic gate is true
before activating the Output.
88
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
6.13 Auxiliary Configuration
Overview
The Auxiliary group has four selections (Switch 1 and Switch 2) and (Func Gen 1 and
Func Gen 2).
Switch
Switch selections have 2 input sources (A and B). A switch block is used to select
between two analog signals. The switch block can be used for many monitor and control
strategies. A Digital Signal Source (Table 6-4) when active will select the B input source
of the switch as the output.
The Switch Input sources can be any Analog Signal Source (Table 6-3).
There are two switch blocks provided for general use.
Func Gen (Function Generator)
Function Generators are used for pre-control linearizing of inputs (such as during pH
titration).
Function Generator selections have 2 input sources (Input 1 PV and Input 2 PV).
It generates an output characteristic curve based on up to 11 configurable “Breakpoints”
for both Input (X) and Output (Y) values.
The figure below shows an example of using the Func Gen to characterize the PID
control loop output for control valve operation using 9 breakpoints.
Compensating for control valve characteristic
OUT9
100%
OUT8
OUT7
FGEN
OUTPUT
OUT6
OUT5
OUT4
OUT3
OUT2
0%
OUT1
X1
X2
X3
X4 X5
X6
X7
X8
PID OUTPUT
0%
100%
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Accessing Auxiliary Menu
Setup
• Press
• Use the
• Press
to display the Main menu.
keys to select “Auxiliary” then press
Enter
to enter the sub-menu.
Enter
to highlight the desired menu selection then press
to display the
group of parameters.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – “General Rules for Editing”.
Table 6-12 Auxiliary Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or Range of Setting
Parameter Definition
In A Source
In B Source
Any Analog Signal
See Table 6-3
Analog Signal Source – Process signal
to be monitored by the Alarm. Any
analog source such as PV, Temperature,
Pharma, Math, Function Generator,
Switch, PID, or Calculated Values*
Switch 1
Switch 2
* units of measure between the two input
boards must be similar
Select B
Any Digital Signal
See Table 6-4
Digital Signal Source when active will
select the B input source of the switch as
the output
Switch
InA
InB
Select B
If Select B is OFF then Switch Output = In A
If Select B is ON then Switch Output = In B
None
Source
Function Generator selections have 2
input sources
(Input 1 PV and Input 2 PV).
Func Gen 1
Func Gen 2
Input 1 PV
Input 2 PV
PID 1 Out
PID 2 Out
ATTENTION
The X (n) value must be < X(n+1) value. Thus, if fewer than 11 breakpoints are needed,
be sure to configure any unneeded breakpoints with the same X and Y values used for the
previous breakpoint.
90
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or Range of Setting
Parameter Definition
X1
Y1
–99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000
–99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000
X-value at Input Breakpoint 1
Y-value at Input Breakpoint 1
X2
Y2
–99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000
–99999 to 999999 Default= 10.000 Y-value at Input Breakpoint 2
X-value at Input Breakpoint 2
X3
Y3
–99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000 X-value at Input Breakpoint 3
–99999 to 999999 Default= 20.000 Y-value at Input Breakpoint 3
–99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000 X-value at Input Breakpoint 4
X4
Y4
–99999 to 999999 Default= 30.000 Y-value at Input Breakpoint 4
X5
Y5
–99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000 X-value at Input Breakpoint 5
–99999 to 999999 Default= 40.000 Y-value at Input Breakpoint 5
–99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000 X-value at Input Breakpoint 6
X6
Y6
–99999 to 999999 Default= 50.000 Y-value at Input Breakpoint 6
X7
Y7
–99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000 X-value at Input Breakpoint 7
–99999 to 999999 Default= 60.000 Y-value at Input Breakpoint 7
–99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000 X-value at Input Breakpoint 8
X8
Y8
–99999 to 999999 Default= 70.000 Y-value at Input Breakpoint 8
X9
Y9
–99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000 X-value at Input Breakpoint 9
–99999 to 999999 Default= 80.000 Y-value at Input Breakpoint 9
–99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000 X-value at Input Breakpoint 10
X10
Y10
–99999 to 999999 Default= 90.000 Y-value at Input Breakpoint 10
X11
Y11
–99999 to 999999 Default= 0.000
–99999 to 999999 Default=
100.000
X-value at Input Breakpoint 11
Y-value at Input Breakpoint 11
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
6.14 PID Control Configuration
Overview
PID (Option) - Proportional (P), Integral (I) and Derivative (D), (3-mode) control action
based on the deviation or error signal created by the difference between the setpoint (SP)
and the Process variable analog input value (PV). PID Tuning parameters are available.
Automatic tuning with Fuzzy Logic Overshoot Suppression can be configured.
Other parameters listed in this group deal with how the analyzer will control the process
including: PV High and Low, Setpoint High and Low limits, the Control Algorithm and
Action, PID Tracking (TRV and TRC), Number of Tuning Parameter Sets and associated
parameters, Setpoint Rate, Power-up Recall, Output Limits, Failsafe Output Value,
Alarm setpoint type and value, and Alarm Hysteresis.
PID Tracking
PID tracking is a means to control a PID’s output without the PID loop winding up.
It is accomplished by the use of two inputs.
TRC (tracking control) – selects the tracking mode (See Table 6-13)
TRV (tracking value) – is the commanded output value in percentage
(PID Output = TRV Input when TRC = ON) (See Table 6-13)
When TRC is active, the front-panel display will indicate TRV for the PID loop.
Remote PID Tracking
Variables can be connected to TRC and TRV to allow remote control of the PID output.
TRC can be connected to a digital variable
TRV can be connected to an analog variable
PID Tracking versus Manual Mode
Tracking is not the same as manual mode.
• Tracking value cannot be adjusted from the front-panel. Manual output value can.
• Manual output cannot be adjusted remotely. Tracking value can.
• Manual has priority over tracking. If operating in the tracking mode, the output
can be adjusted from the front-panel by selecting manual and adjusting the output.
When manual is terminated, the active mode will be TRC and the output will go
to TRV.
Using Auto/Manual Switch
It may be desirable to use a discrete input to place a PID into manual momentarily to
freeze the output. With tracking, this can be done.
1. Connect the TRV to PID output
2. Connect the TRC to a discrete input
When the discrete input is active, the output is frozen – MANUAL select.
When the discrete input is inactive, the PID runs in the auto mode – AUTO select.
92
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
While TRV is active, the output can be adjusted using manual mode from the front-panel.
After manual mode is terminated, the output will remain at the level because the output is
tied to TRV.
ATTENTION
Upgrading software on the UDA2182 to a new version will remove PID control (on units where PID has
been ordered or been added in the Field).
Therefore, the following steps need to be followed in order to retrieve that option:
If PID was ordered when the unit was originally ordered:
• Retrieve your Unit ID by going to the MAINTENANCE Æ SYSTEM menu
• Call GTS (1-800-423-9883)
• Inform them that you are going to do a software upgrade and you need the Option ID for your unit
(this is why you need the Unit ID)
• Record Option ID for next step
• After upgrading software, go to MAINTENANCE Æ SYSTEM menu and enter the recorded
OPTION ID value.
• The PID will have to be reconfigured to settings prior to upgrade.
If PID was added after the unit was originally shipped:
•
Before upgrading software, go to MAINTENANCE Æ SYSTEM menu and record the OPTION ID
value.
•
After upgrading software, go to MAINTENANCE Æ SYSTEM menu and enter the recorded
OPTION ID value.
The PID will have to be reconfigured to settings prior to upgrade.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Accessing Control Menu
(See “Maintenance” Menu item (Section 6.18), “System” selection to Enable PID
Control)
Setup
• Press
to display the Main menu.
Enter
• Use the
keys to select “PID Control” then press
to enter the sub-
menu.
PID Control 1 and 2 are divided into 3 sections:
PID(n) Config (Table 6-13),
PID(n)Tune (Table 6-14),
PID(n)Alarms (Table 6-15)
Enter
• Press
to highlight the desired menu selection then press
group of parameters.
to display the
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – “General Rules for Editing”.
Table 6-13 PID Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or
Range of Setting
Parameter Definition
None
Input 1 PV (default)
Input 2 PV
PV Source
Process Variable Source
PID 1 Config
PID 2 Config
PV High
-99999 to 99999
default = High
Range of PV Input
Input Range of the PV - High Range Value
These values are in units of that Input PV, such
as 0-14pH.
PV Low
-99999 to 99999
default = Low
Range of PV Input
Input Range of the PV - Low Range Value
These values are in units of that Input PV, such as
0-14pH.
SP High Limit
SP Low Limit
Output High Limit
Output Low Limit
-99999 to 99999
default = High
Range of PV Input
Setpoint High Limit Value - prevents the
setpoint from going above the value set here.
-99999 to 99999
default = Low
Range of PV Input
Setpoint Low Limit Value - prevents the
setpoint from going below the value set here.
-99999 to 99999
default = 100.00
Output High Limit Value - is the highest value
of output beyond which you do not want the
automatic output to exceed.
-99999 to 99999
default = 0.00
Output Low Limit Value - is the lowest value of
output beyond which you do not want the
automatic output to go below.
94
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Control Alg
Selection or
Range of Setting
Parameter Definition
PIDA (default)
PIDB
Duplex A
Duplex B
PID A - is normally used for 3-mode control.
The output can be adjusted somewhere
between 100 % and 0 %. It applies all three
control actions -Proportional (P), Integral (I),
and Derivative (D) - to the error signal.
Note:
PID B - Unlike the PID-A equation, the
analyzer gives only an integral response to a
setpoint change, with no effect on the output
due to the Gain or Rate action, and gives full
response to PV changes.
In PID A, a step
change in setpoint
will result in a step
change in output.
In PID B, step
DUPA - like PID A but provides an automatic
method to switch tuning constant sets.
changes in setpoint
will not bump the
output; the output
will slew smoothly
to the new value.
DUPB - like PID B but provides an automatic
method to switch tuning constant sets.
Note: For Duplex A and Duplex B if the output
is greater than 50%, then tuning set 1 is used.
If the output is less than 50%, then tuning set 2
is used.
Control Action
Direct
Reverse (default)
DIRECT - PID action causes output to
increase as process variable increases.
REVERSE - PID action causes output to
decrease as process variable increases.
Power Mode
Power Out
Manual(default)
Last
Mode permitted at power up.
Failsafe (default)
Output at Power up
Last
FAILSAFE - Failsafe output value.
LAST - Same as at power down.
Failsafe Out
-5.00 to 105.00%
default = 0.00
Failsafe Output Value – The Output value to
which the analyzer will go if there is a power
down or Failsafe condition (Input Faults).
Any Digital Signal
See Table 6-4
Manual Select
SP Power On
Selects Manual Output
Setpoint at Power up
Last
LAST - Same as at power down.
Local SP(default)
Local SP – Local Setpoint value.
Any Analog Signal
See Table 6-3
RSP Source
Ratio
Selects the analog signal that will be used as
the remote setpoint. The remote setpoint
should be supplied in PV engineering units.
1.0 (Default)
Ratio that is applied to the Remote Setpoint.
-20 to 20
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or
Range of Setting
Parameter Definition
Bias
0.0 Default
Bias that is applied to the Remote Setpoint.
-9999 to 99999
Monitor (1 – 4)
Logic (1 – 4)
Digital In (1 – 2)
RSP Select
FF Source
FF Gain
When this input is ON, the Remote Setpoint is
used. If set to None, the operator can select
the remote setpoint from the PID operator
display.
Any Analog Signal
See Table 6-3
Feed Forward value that is applied to the
output. A change in the feed forward signal
input will result in a proportional change in the
output per the feed forward gain parameter.
1.000 (default)
0.1 to 1000.0
Feed Forward Gain used to calculate the
change in the PID output based upon a change
of the feed forward input signal.
Any Digital Signal
See Table 6-4
TRC Select
TRV Select
TRC (tracking control) – selects the tracking
mode
Any Analog Signal
See Table 6-3
TRV (tracking value) – is the commanded
output value in percentage
(PID Output = TRV Input when TRC = ON)
When TRC is active, the front-panel display will
indicate TRC for the PID loop.
Variables can be connected to TRC and TRV
to allow remote control of the PID output.
TRC can be connected to a digital variable
TRV can be connected to an analog variable
Manual Permit
Auto Permit
LSP Permit
RSP Permit
Enable (default)
Disable
Allows the operator to select Manual Operation
of the PID loop from the PID Operator Display
Enable (default)
Disable
Allows the operator to select Auto Operation of
the PID loop from the PID Operator Display
Enable (default)
Disable
Allows the operator to select the Local Setpoint
from the PID Operator Display
Enable (default)
Disable
Allows the operator to select the Remote
Setpoint from the PID Operator Display
96
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Table 6-14 PID Tuning
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Accutune
Selection or
Range of Setting
Parameter Definition
Enable
Disable (default)
When enabled, the analyzer will start
PID 1 Tune
PID 2 Tune
controlling to the setpoint while it identifies the
process and adjusts the Gain or Proportional
Band (P), Rate (I), and Reset Time (D) tuning
constants in response to setpoint changes
and/or Process Variable disturbances.
Fuzzy Logic
Enable
Disable (default)
Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression minimizes
overshoot after a setpoint change or a process
disturbance.
The fuzzy logic observes the speed and
direction of the PV signal as it approaches the
setpoint and temporarily modifies the internal
control response action as necessary to avoid
an overshoot.
There is no change to the PID algorithm, and
the fuzzy logic does not alter the PID tuning
parameters.
This feature can be independently Enabled or
Disabled as required by the application to work
with Accutune.
Use Prop Band
Use RPM
Enable
Disable (default)
When enabled, Proportional band is used
instead of Gain (default).
See “Gain or Prop Band”.
Enable
Disable (default)
When enabled, Repeat per minute is used
instead of Minutes per Repeat (default).
See “Reset”.
Gain or Prop Band
Gain – 0.1% to
1000.0%
Gain (default) – is the ratio of output change
(%) over the measured variable change (%)
that caused it.
PB – 0.1 to
1000.0%
100 %
G =
PB %
default = 1.000
where Prop Band is the proportional Band (in
%of Input Range)
Proportional Band (Prop Band) - is the
percentage of the range of the measured
variable for which a proportional controller will
produce a 100 % change in its output.
Rate
-0.035 to 10.000
RATE action, in minutes affects the control
output whenever the deviation is changing; and
affects it more when the deviation is changing
faster. The amount of corrective action
depends on the value of Gain.
default = 0.000
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Reset
Selection or
Range of Setting
Parameter Definition
-0.02 to 50
RESET (Integral Time) - adjusts the control
output according to both the size of the
deviation (SP-PV) and the time it lasts. The
amount of corrective action depends on the
value of Gain.
default = 1.000
The reset adjustment is measured as how
many times proportional action is repeated per
minute (Repeats/minute) or how many minutes
before one repeat of the proportional action
occurs (Minutes/repeat – default).
Tune Set 2
None (default)
Monitor 1
Monitor 2
Monitor 3
Monitor 4
Logic 1
Digital Source for selection of Tuning set 2.
When active, this input will override the current
tuning set selection and force the PID to use
tuning set 2. This applies for non-duplex type
control.
Logic 2
Logic 3
Logic 4
Digital In 1
Digital In 2
Note: For duplex control types, the tune set is
automatically select by the output zone (Tune
2 selected for Output < 50).
Gain or Prop Band 2 0.1 to 1000.0
Gain or Prop Band2 for Tuning Set 2. Same as
Gain or Prop Band.
default = 1.000
Rate 2
-0.035 to 10.000
Rate 2 for Tuning Set 2. Same as Rate.
default = 0.000
Reset 2
-0.02 to 50
Reset 2 for Tuning Set 2 Same as Reset.
default = 1.000
Table 6-15 PID Alarms
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Alm 1 SP1 Type
Selection or
Range of Setting
Parameter Definition
No Alarm (default)
PV High
PV Low
Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 Type
High PV Alarm: PV > Alm SP
Low PV Alarm: PV < Arm SP
PID 1 Alarms
PID 2 Alarms
Dev High
Dev Low
SP High
SP Low
Output High
Output Low
High Deviation Alarm: |PV – SP| > Alm SP
Low Deviation Alarm: |PV – SP| < Alm SP
High Setpoint Alarm: SP > Alm SP
Low Setpoint Alarm: SP < Alm SP
High Output Alarm: Out > Alm SP
Low Output Alarm: Out < Alm SP
Alm 1 SP1 Value
-99999 to 99999
Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 Value
default = 0.000
98
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or
Range of Setting
Parameter Definition
Alm 1 SP2 Type
Same as Alarm 1
Same as Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 Type
Setpoint 1
No Alarm (default)
Alm 1 SP2 Value
Alm 2 SP1 Type
-99999 to 99999
default = 0.000
Alarm 1 Setpoint 2 Value
Same as Alarm 1
Same as Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 Type
Setpoint 1
No Alarm (default)
Alm 2 SP1 Value
Alm 2 SP2 Type
-99999 to 99999
default = 0.000
Alarm 2 Setpoint 1 Value
Same as Alarm 1
Same as Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 Type
Setpoint 1
No Alarm (default)
Alm 2 SP2 Value
Alm Hysteresis
-99999 to 99999
default = 0.000
Alarm 2 Setpoint 2 Value
0 to 100%
default = 0.00
Alarm Hysteresis – an adjustable overlap of
the ON/OFF states of each alarm.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
6.15 Auto Cycling Configuration
6.15.1 Overview
Auto cycling provides automated timing, control and functionality for the cleaning and
calibration of input probes. Each input PV has a dedicated auto cycle function block.
The input board type and in the case of pH, the PV type, determines the level of auto
cycling capability, as indicated below:
Input Board Type
Preamp pH
Auto Cycle Operation
Rinse, Auto Buffer Cal 1 (zero offset), Auto Buffer Cal 2 (slope)
Rinse, Auto Buffer Cal 1, Auto Buffer Cal 2
pH/ORP, PV Type not
ORP
pH/ORP, PV type is ORP
Conductivity
DO ppm
Rinse Only
Rinse Only
Rinse, Auto Air Cal
Rinse, Auto Air Cal
DO ppb
Auto cycling is supported with setup menus, status displays and operational displays
(Section 5.7) as well as event (Section 5.11) and calibration history logging (Section 11).
6.15.2 Accessing Auto Cycle Menu
Setup
• Press
to display the Main menu.
Enter
• Use the
keys to select “Auto Cycling” then press
to enter the sub-
menu:
Auto Cycle 1 or Auto Cycle 2
Enter
• Press to highlight the desired menu selection then press
to display the
group of parameters.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – “General Rules for Editing”.
100
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
6.15.3 Auto Cycling Configuration
Table 6-16 Auto Cycling Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or Range
of Setting
Parameter Definition and Restrictions
Auto Cycling
Allows auto cycling to be selected. This
should be enabled after configuration is
complete.
Disable (default)
Enable
Auto Cycle 1
Auto Cycle 2
Hold Active
When enabled, the output(s) sourced by input
n for Auto Clean n is in hold during auto
cycling.
Enable (default)
Disable
Probe Transit
When enabled, allows probe extract and
probe insert sequence steps to occur and
automated probe extract and insert
parameters are made available.
Disable (default)
Enable
None or Any Digital
Signal
See Table 6-4
Cycle Start Source
Starts Auto Cycle on specific Digital Signal
selected changing from 0 to 1.
None or Any Digital
Signal
See Table 6-4
Extract Wait Src
(Probe Transit =
Enabled)
Allows selection of a specific Digital Signal
that causes a delay in the probe extraction
sequence. While the selected digital input is
active the probe extraction will not end unless
a timeout occurs as determined by the
duration configured in Probe Transit Mins. If
a source is configured, the timeout results in
an Auto Cycle Fail. If a digital signal is not
available, the source may be left at “None”
and the extract step will occur for the duration
of Probe Transit Mins.
None or Any Digital
Signal
See Table 6-4
Insert Wait Src
(Probe Transit =
Enabled)
Allows selection of a specific Digital Signal
that causes a delay in the probe insertion
sequence. While the selective digital input is
active the probe insertion will not end unless a
timeout occurs as determined by the duration
configured in Probe Transit Mins. If a source
is configured, the timeout results in an Auto
Cycle Fail. If a digital signal is not available,
the source may be left at “None” and the
extract step will occur for the duration of
Probe Transit Mins.
Frequency of Auto Cycle occurrence
Cycle Interval
Off(default)
Monthly
Weekly
Daily
Custom
Start Time
(Custom)
Set specific time for Auto-Cycle to start.
Disable (default)
Enable
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Start Day
Selection or Range
of Setting
Parameter Definition and Restrictions
Cycle Interval is Monthly
Cycle Interval is Weekly
1 to 28 (default = 1)
(Dependent
parameters)
Sunday – Saturday
(default = Sunday)
Cycle Interval is Custom, Start Time enabled
Cycle Interval is Monthly, Weekly, Daily
1 to 31 (default = 1)
Start Hour
0 to 23
(default = 12)
(Dependent
parameters)
Start Mins
Cycle Interval is Monthly, Weekly or Daily
Cycle Interval is Custom, Start Time enabled
0 to 59 (default = 0)
(Dependent
parameters)
Period Days
(Custom)
The period day parameter allows the selection
of how often the Auto cycle will occur.
For Example: 20 means that the Auto Cycle
will occur every 20 days.
0 to 100(default =
0)
Period Hours
(custom)
For Example: 4 means that the Auto-cycle will
occur every 4 hours when the days and
minutes are set to 0.
0 to 23 (default = 1)
0 to 59 (default = 0)
Period Mins
For Example: 30 means that the Auto-cycle
will occur every 30 minutes when the days
and hours are set to 0.
Allows selection for frequency of rinse occurrence.
Rinse Cycle Cnt
0 to 100(default =
1)
Allows selection for frequency of calibration
occurrence. For Example: 1 indicates that a
calibration will occur every cycle while a 10
indicates that a calibration will occur every 10th
cycle.
Cal Cycle Cnt
(PV is DO)
0 to 100(default =
1)
Allows selection for frequency of calibration
occurrences.
Cal 1 Cycle Cnt
(PV is pH)
0 to 100(default =
1)
Allows selection for frequency of calibration
occurrences.
Cal 2 Cycle Cnt
(PV is pH)
0 to 100(default =
1)
Maximum Probe Transit time in minutes.
Max Transit Mins
0 to 30.00
(default = 0.50)
(Probe Transit =
Enabled)
Duration of Rinse sequence in minutes
Rinse Mins
0 to 30.00
(default = 0.50)
Maximum calibration time in minutes. Enough time
should be entered to allow process stabilization
and a 20 second measurement time.
Max Cal Mins
(PV pH, DO)
0 to 30.00
(default = 0.50)
102
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or Range
of Setting
Parameter Definition and Restrictions
Process resume delay in minutes.
Resume Dly Mins
0 to 30.00
(default = 0.50)
6.15.4 pH Auto Cycling Configuration Example
The example in Table 6-17 configures the UDA to perform a rinse function once per day,
at 8:00 AM, and once per week perform a 1 point Standardization, using 7 buffer. Then
once every 4 weeks, perform a complete 2 point Standardize & Slope, using 7 buffer and
4 buffer. Also assume that the sensor is retracted from the sample line during the rinse
and cal (not required).
Table 6-17 Example Auto Cycling Configuration for pH
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or Range
of Setting
Parameter Definition and Restrictions
Auto Cycling
Enable
Enable
Enable
Allows auto cycling to be selected. This
should be enabled after configuration is
complete.
Auto Cycle 1
Auto Cycle 2
Hold Active
When enabled, the output(s) sourced by input
n for Auto Clean n is in hold during auto
cycling.
Probe Transit
When enabled, allows probe extract and
probe insert sequence steps to occur and
automated probe extract and insert
parameters are made available.
None
Cycle Start Source
Extract Wait Src
Digital Signal 1
See Table 6-4
This is the end of travel “out” switch on the
extraction device
Digital Signal 2
See Table 6-4
Insert Wait Src
This is the end of travel “in” switch on the
extraction device
Frequency of Auto Cycle to occur daily
Cycle to start at 8:00 AM
Cycle Interval
Start Hour
Daily
8
0
1
7
Start Mins
Rinse to occur every cycle.
Rinse Cycle Cnt
Cal 1 Cycle Cnt
Standardize occurs once every 7 cycles, or once
per week.
Slope Cal occurs once per 28 days, or every 4
weeks
Cal 2 Cycle Cnt
28
If extraction takes longer than 30 seconds, then get
a “AUTOCYCLE FAIL ALARM”
Max Transit Mins
0.5
(Probe Transit =
Enabled)
Each rinse duration is 2 minutes
Rinse Mins
2
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or Range
of Setting
Parameter Definition and Restrictions
If the reading is unstable after 2 minutes then get a
“AUTOCYCLE FAIL ALARM”.
Max Cal Mins
2
Wait 5 minutes after cycle completes and sensor is
reinserted before removing HOLD and returning to
On-Line mode.
Resume Dly Mins
5
104
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
6.16 Variables Configuration
Overview
The Variables menu allows you to configure the values that variables are set to when the UDA is
first powered on.
This group has two selections:
Analog
This selection lets you configure the initial values of the Analog Variables.
Digital
This selection lets you configure the initial values of the Digital Variables.
Accessing Variables Menu
Setup
• Press
• Use the
• Press
to display the Main menu.
Enter
keys to select “Variables” then press
to enter the sub-menu.
Enter
to highlight the desired menu selection then press
to display the
group of parameters.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – “General Rules for Editing”.
Table 6-18 Variables Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or Range
of Setting
Parameter Definition
Anlg Var 1 Init
Anlg Var 2 Init
Anlg Var 3 Init
Anlg Var 4 Init
Dgtl Var 1 Init
Dgtl Var 2 Init
Dgtl Var 3 Init
Dgtl Var 4 Init
-99999.99 to
99999.99
Initial Values of the Analog Variable applied at
power on.
Analog
Digital
Off
Initial Values of the Digital Variable applied at
power on.
ON
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
6.17Communication Configuration
Overview
The communication menu allows you to configure the Communications Card. There are four
selections:
IR Front Panel – configure the IR Front Panel interface
Modbus – configure the byte order
RS485 – configure the RS485 interface of the Communications Card.
Ethernet – configure the Ethernet interface of the Communication card.
Accessing Communication Menu
Setup
• Press
to display the Main menu.
Enter
• Use the
keys to select “Communication” then press
to enter the sub-
menu.
Enter
• Press
to highlight the desired menu selection then press
group of parameters.
to display the
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – “General Rules for Editing”.
Table 6-19 Communication Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or Range
of Setting
Parameter Definition
Port Reset
Off (default)
Enable
When enabled, Port Reset initializes the IR
Interface.
IR Front
Panel
Mode
Enable(default)
Setup
Address
Enable - allows IR to work anytime. No IR
address required and on any front-panel screen.
Setup – IR only works when the front-panel is in
a setup screen. This will allow the IR interface
to be password protected if a password is
configured. No IR address required.
Disable
Address -- The UDA’s IR address must be used
to communicate to the UDA.
Disable – The UDA will not respond to any
request on the IR interface.
Word Swap
Port Reset
Yes (default)
No
Modbus
RS485
Word Swap lets you set the word order for
Modbus communications.
YES – sets the order to “Big Endian” format
NO – sets the order to “Little Endian” format
Off (default)
Enable
Enable selection resets the Communication card.
It should be enabled when the Address or Baud
Rate or both are changed.
106
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Address
Selection or Range
of Setting
Parameter Definition
0 to 999 (default = 0) Modbus RTU Slave ID – 0 is offline
Baud Rate
2400 (default)
4800
Modbus RTU Baud Rate
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
Port Reset
DHCP
Off (default)
Enable
Enable selection resets the Communication card.
It should be enabled when configurations for
Ethernet are modified.
Ethernet
No (default)
Yes
When YES, Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
server automatically assigns a dynamic IP
address to UDA.
The set dynamic IP can be seen from “Comm
Status” display.
IpAddr Octet 1
IpAddr Octet 2
IpAddr Octet 3
IpAddr Octet 4
0 to 255
0 to 255
These parameters are visible only when DHCP
option is NO.
Allows you to assign Static IP address to the
UDA.
SbntMsk Octet 1
SbntMsk Octet 2
SbntMsk Octet 3
SbntMsk Octet 4
These parameters are visible only when DHCP
option is NO.
Allows you to assign Subnet Mask as per the
local network settings
Dflt Gtwy Octet 1 0 to 255
Dflt Gtwy Octet 2
These parameters are visible only when DHCP
option is NO.
Dflt Gtwy Octet 3
Dflt Gtwy Octet 4
Allows you to assign the Default Gateway as per
the local network settings
DNS Srvr Octet 1 0 to 255
DNS Srvr Octet 2
These parameters are visible only when DHCP
option is NO.
DNS Srvr Octet 3
DNS Srvr Octet 4
Allows you to assign the DNS server IP address
as per the local network settings
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
6.18 Maintenance Configuration
Accessing Maintenance Menu
Setup
• Press
to display the Main menu.
keys to select “Maintenance” then press
Enter
• Use the
to enter the sub-
menu.
Enter
• Press
to highlight the desired menu selection then press
to highlight the parameter selection, then press
to display the
group of parameters.
Enter
• Press
to allow changes.
Refer to “Section 6.4.1 – “General Rules for Editing”.
Table 6-20 Maintenance Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or Range of
Setting
Parameter Definition
SW Version*
Software version
number
Read Only
System
*See note at end of table
Language
Multi-language prompts guide the operator step-
by-step through the configuration process
assuring quick and accurate entry of all
configurable parameters.
Select from: English, French, German, Spanish
and Italian (Language Set EE).
Language Set EE
English (default)
Italiano
Deutsch
Francais
Espanõl
English, Russian and Turkish (Language Set RT)
Language Set RT
English (default)
Pусский
Türkçe
English, Polish and Czech (Language Set PC)
Language Set PC
English (default)
Polski
Česká
Read Only -
Language Set
Read only language set of the software
EE - English, French, German, Spanish and Italian
RT - English, Russian and Turkish
EE
RT
PC
PC - English, Polish and Czech
Mains Freq
This function determines the frequency of AC line
noise suppression for the input ADC circuitry.
60 Hz (default)
50 Hz
108
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or Range of
Setting
Parameter Definition
Password
Setup configuration, calibration and maintenance
functions can be password-protected. The
password can be any number between 1 and
9999 or letters. (When the password is zero, the
operator will not be prompted to enter a
password.)
0000 (default) to 9999
AAAA to ZZZZ
Follow the “ General Rules for Editing” to change
the digits.
Unit ID
Read Only
Unit Identification
Option ID Number
Option ID*
= 0 if PID is not available
= ID Number if PID available
*See note at end of table
PID Control*
Unit Reset
1 Loop
2 Loops (default)
Enables the PID Control configuration
Parameters
*See note at end of table
Unit Reset initializes all calibration and
configuration data to factory default values, with
the exception of the Factory Temperature
Calibration correction values
No (default)
Yes
Input 1 Type
Input 2 Type
Read Only
pH/ORP - pH or Oxidation Reduction Potential
pH Preamp – pH with preamplifier
Conductivity (Dual if both inputs same)
DO ppm - Dissolved Oxygen
Inputs
DO ppb - Dissolved Oxygen
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or Range of
Setting
Parameter Definition
Cond Units
Type
NIST (default)
The NIST system of conductivity measurement
uses units of centimeters, and in the UDA are
specifically µS/cm and mS/cm for conductivity
and KΩ-m for resistivity.
The ISO system of conductivity measurement
uses units of meters, and in the UDA are
specifically μS/m, mS/m and S/m for conductivity
and KΩ-m for resistivity.
ISO
The conductivity “Units Type” selected here
affects the “PV Type” selections available under
“Setup/Inputs/pH Preamp n. Selection of units
type will scale all live conductivity and Resistivity
readings on monitor and input calibration screens
according to the factors listed:
NIST
μS/cm
μS/cm
mS/cm
MΩ-cm
ISO
μS/m
ISO/NIST factor
0.01
mS/m
S/m
10
10
0.1
KΩ-m
Cond Wire
Size
“Wire Size Units” allows selection of either AWG
or Square millimeters (Sqmm). When changing
units, the wire size parameter value is not
AWG (default)
Sq mm
converted. A pop-up message warns you of this.
Cond Wire Len
“Wire Length Units” allows selection of either
meters or feet for the Wire Length parameter in
the Inputs group. When changing units, the wire
length parameter value is not converted. A pop-
up message warns you of this. If the value is no
longer within range, it will change to closest
range limit.
Feet (default)
Meters
Cation Calc
None
None
Ammonia pH – Specific conductivity
temperature compensation assumes Ammonia
pH NH3
NH3 is the base reagent
pH Amines
ppbCO2
Amine pH – Specific conductivity temperature
compensation assuming a generic amine base.
CO2 determination by degassed conductivity.
110
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Sub-menu
selection
Parameter
Selection or Range of
Setting
Parameter Definition
Temp Units
º F
“Temperature Units” allows selection of either
degrees C or degrees F for the display of
measured temperature on monitor,
º C (default)
pharmacopoeia, control and input calibration
screens and for the entry of manual temperature
input values in Setup/Inputs. When changing the
temperature units, the manual temperature input
value is not converted. A pop-up message warns
you of this. If the value is no longer within range,
it will change to the closest range limit.
1 Label (default)
2 Labels
Header
Label
Determines the time and date displayed within
the Monitor Display header.
Display
Label/Time
Date/Time
Alphanumeric text
Header Format is 1 Label
(max 16 characters)
default: “Honeywell
UDA”
Label
Alphanumeric text
Header Format is Label/Time
(max 10 characters)
default: “Honeywell”
Label 1
Label 2
Alphanumeric text
(max 10 characters)
Header Format is Label 1 / Label 2
Header Format is Label 1 / Label 2
default: “Honeywell”
Alphanumeric text
(max 10 characters)
default: “UDA2182”
Clr Evt Hist
Clr Cal Hist
Clear Event History – Yes, clears the Event
History Screen (see Section 5.11)
No (default)
Yes
Clear Cal History – Yes, clears the Calibration
History Screen (see Section 11)
No (default)
Yes
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Tag Names
Select Tag and Press “Enter”. Follow the “General Rules for Editing” to edit the character
string.
Input 1
Input 2
0 to 16 Characters
The real-time displays of process values show
the instrument’s tag name (or other configurable
fixed sixteen-character string) at the top of the
screen.
PID Loop 1
PID Loop 2
Auto Cycle 1
Auto Cycle 2
Pharma 1
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 4
YYYY/MM/DD
(default)
MM/DD/YYYY
DD/MM/YYYY
24 Hour (default)
12 Hour
Date Format
The parameters Date Format and Time Format
determine how time and date are displayed in
both the Monitor Display header and the Event
History.
Clock
Time Format
2005-2037
Year
Month
Day
1 to 12
1 – 28, 29, 30 or 31
(default: 1)
(determined by year
& month)
Hour
0 – 23 (24 Hour
format)
1 – 12 (12 Hour
format)
AM/PM
AM (default)
PM
Time Format is 12
Hour
Minutes
0 – 59
Display Test
Off (default)
Enable
Display Test action occurs when the “Enter” key
is pressed to accept the selection.
Tests
Keypad Test
When the keyboard test is enabled, the Status
Message area displays the name of the key
currently pressed.
Off (default)
Enable
Note: The keypad test will exit three seconds
after no key is pressed.
112
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration
Output Level 1
Output Level 2
Output Level 3
Off (default)
0%
25%
50%
75%
Output action occurs when the “Enter” key is
pressed to accept selection.
Actual output current is consistent with selected
current range of 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA.
100%
Low Limit
High Limit
Relay 1 State
Relay 2 State
Relay 3 State
Relay 4 State
Off (default)
Energized
De-energized
Relay state action occurs when the “Enter” key is
pressed to accept selection.
*ATTENTION
Upgrading software on the UDA2182 to a new version will remove PID control (on units where PID has
been ordered or been added in the Field).
Therefore, the following steps need to be followed in order to retrieve that option:
If PID was ordered when the unit was originally ordered:
• Retrieve your Unit ID by going to the MAINTENANCE Æ SYSTEM menu
• Call GTS (1-800-423-9883)
• Inform them that you are going to do a software upgrade and you need the Option ID for your unit
(this is why you need the Unit ID)
• Record Option ID for next step
• After upgrading software, go to MAINTENANCE Æ SYSTEM menu and enter the recorded
OPTION ID value.
• The PID will have to be reconfigured to settings prior to upgrade.
If PID was added after the unit was originally shipped:
•
•
•
Before upgrading software, go to MAINTENANCE Æ SYSTEM menu and record the OPTION ID
value.
After upgrading software, go to MAINTENANCE Æ SYSTEM menu and enter the recorded
OPTION ID value.
The PID will have to be reconfigured to settings prior to upgrade.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputs and Outputs Wiring
7 Inputs and Outputs Wiring
7.1 Overview
Introduction
This section contains instructions for wiring the inputs and outputs of the Analyzer.
What’s in this section?
The topics in this section are listed below.
Topic
See Page
114
7.1 Overview
7.2 General Wiring Practices
7.3 Inputs and Outputs
115
117
7.4 Direct pH/ORP Input Wiring Diagrams
7.5 pH Input from External Preamplifier/Cap Adapter Wiring Diagrams
7.6 Conductivity
120
126
130
7.7 Dissolved Oxygen
131
7.8 Communications Card
7.9 Outputs
133
134
7.10 Option Card
135
114
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputs and Outputs Wiring
7.2 General Wiring Practices
WARNING
Qualified personnel should perform wiring only.
Safety precaution
WARNING
A disconnect switch must be installed to break all current
carrying conductors. Turn off power before working on
conductors. Failure to observe this precaution may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING
An external disconnect switch is required for any hazardous
voltage connections to the relay outputs.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the case when connecting to a rigid metallic conduit system, the
conduit hub must be connected to the conduit before the hub is connected to the
enclosure
Avoid damage to components
ATTENTION
This equipment contains devices that can be damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD). As
solid-state technology advances and as solid-state devices get smaller and smaller, they
become more and more sensitive to ESD. The damage incurred may not cause the device to
fail completely, but may cause early failure. Therefore, it is imperative that assemblies
containing static sensitive devices be carried in conductive plastic bags. When adjusting or
performing any work on such assemblies, grounded workstations and wrist straps must be
used. If soldering irons are used, they must also be grounded.
A grounded workstation is any conductive or metallic surface connected to an earth ground,
such as a water pipe, with a 1/2 to 1 megohm resistor in series with the ground connection. The
purpose of the resistor is to current limit an electrostatic discharge and to prevent any shock
hazard to the operator. The steps indicated above must be followed to prevent damage and/or
degradation, which may be induced by ESD, to static sensitive devices.
Immunity compliance
In applications where either the power, input or output wiring are subject to
electromagnetic disturbances, shielding techniques will be required. Grounded metal
conduit with conductive conduit fittings is recommended.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputs and Outputs Wiring
Conform to code
Instrument wiring should conform to regulations of the National Electrical Code.
Recommended maximum wire size
Table 7-1 Recommended Maximum Wire Size
Gage Number
mm2
Description
14
2.081
power, relays, and PE
(protective earth)
18
18
0.823
0.823
inputs
isolated outputs
Shielded wiring for locations with interference
In applications where plastic conduit or open wire trays are used, shielded milticonductor
22 gage (0.326 mm2) or heavier signal input wiring is required.
Avoiding interference
Instrument wiring is considered Level 1, per section 6.3 of IEEE STD. 518 for plant
facilities layout and instrumentation application. Level 1 wiring must not be run close to
higher level signals such as power lines or drive signals for phase fired SCR systems, etc.
Unprotected input wiring in high electrical noise environments is subject to
electromagnetic, electrostatic, and radio frequency interference pickup of sufficient
magnitude to overload input filters. The best instrument performance is obtained by
keeping the interfering signals out of the instruments altogether by using proper wiring
practices.
References
Refer to the following when wiring the unit.
• IEEE STD. 518, Guide for the Installation of Electrical Equipment to Minimize
Electrical Noise Inputs from External Sources.
• Appropriate wiring diagram supplied with electrode mounting or preamplifier
module.
116
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputs and Outputs Wiring
7.3 Inputs and Outputs
Introduction
The analyzer can accept single or dual inputs from Honeywell Direct pH, pH Input from
External Preamplifier, ORP, Contacting Conductivity and Dissolved Oxygen sensors.
Two analog outputs standard
One additional output optional
Two electromechanical relays standard
Two additional relays optional
Two Digital Inputs
Wiring these inputs and outputs is described here.
Accessing the terminals
The wiring is easily accessible through the front and the boards can be pulled out to
facilitate the wiring of sensor input.
Open the case.
*ATTENTION
The display cable can become loose from the connector on the display board. Follow these
instructions for re-inserting the cable into the connector:
Open connector by carefully lifting connector as shown:
Once the cable has been inserted carefully close the connector.
Loosen the four captive screws on the front of the bezel.
Grasp the bezel on the right side. Lift the bezel gently and swing the bezel open to the
left.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputs and Outputs Wiring
Wiring terminals and board location
Communications Board Location
Option Board Location
Input 1 Board Location
with pH, ORP or
pH Preamp
Input Board* and Terminals
Power Supply/
Analog Output/
Relay Output
Board Location
* Boards can be in either location
Input 2 Board Location
with Conductivity or
Dissolved Oxygen
L1
L2
N
Input Board* and Terminals
Board Retainer
Power Supply Terminals
Ground Screws
(5)
Ground Stud
Wiring Access Ports
Inside case with door open
Figure 7-1 Wiring Terminals and board Location
Procedure
WARNING
While the unit is powered, a potentially lethal shock hazard
exists inside the case. Do not open the case while the unit is
powered.
118
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputs and Outputs Wiring
Table 7-2 Procedure for installing Input and Output wiring
Step
1
Action
Go to Configuration setup to view the displays showing analog input, relay, and analog
output use. Note the assignments shown. You must wire the unit to match these
assignments in order for the analyzer to work as expected (See Section 6).
ATTENTION
Turn off the power to the analyzer.
More than one switch may be required to remove power.
With power off, open the case:
2
• Loosen the four captive screws on the front of the bezel.
• Grasp the bezel on the right side. Lift the bezel gently and swing the bezel open to the left.
Refer to Figure 7-1 for the location of the terminal board retainer. Loosen the screws that
hold the retainer and slide the retainer left until the retainer tabs disengage from the terminal
boards.
3
4
5
6
Insert a screwdriver into the tab in the terminal board to be wired and pull out gently. Slide
the board half way out. There is a notch in the terminal board into which you can slide the
retainer tabs and hold the boards in place while wiring.
Connect the inputs from the electrode or cells to the terminals in accordance with the
configuration setup assignments. Refer to the wiring diagram provided with the electrode or
cell, and to Figure 7-2 through Figure 7-20
Analog outputs (In addition to the standard outputs, one more is available as an option). See
Option Board Wiring - Figure 7-20). Connect the outputs from the Analyzer terminals in
accordance with the configuration setup assignments. Refer to the wiring diagrams provided
with the field devices receiving the signals, and to Figure 7-2 through Figure 7-20.
If the relay outputs are to be used, leave the unit open and powered down. The relays can
be used for Time Proportioning Output, Pulse Frequency Output, and Digital Output control
as well as alarm annunciation. (In addition to the standard relays, two more are available as
an option. See Option Board Wiring - Figure 7-20). Connect the outputs from the Analyzer
terminals in accordance with the configuration setup assignments. Refer to the wiring
diagrams provided with the external device and to Figure 7-2 through Figure 7-20.
7
These relays can be programmed to de-energize or energize on alarm. Use the
Maintenance configuration setup to specify relay state. (NOTE 1)
CAUTION: Alarm circuits are not internally fused in the analyzer. Provision for fuses in
external circuits is recommended.
Slide the retainer to the left then slide the terminal board back into place. Slide retainer to
8
engage the tabs and tighten the screws.
Close the Bezel and secure four captive screws to a torque value of .20Nm (1.5 Lb-in).
Power up the unit.
9
Do not apply power until the bezel is closed.
Note 1: If set to de-energize on alarm, this means that when an alarm occurs (or the discrete control point
becomes active), the relay coil will be de-energized. The NC contacts will then be closed and the NO
contacts will be open. Conversely, during normal non-alarm operation (or when the control point is not
active) the NC contacts will be open, and the NO contacts will be closed. If de-energize on alarm is selected,
a power loss will force all relays to the same position as an alarm condition.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputs and Outputs Wiring
7.4 Direct pH/ORP Input Wiring Diagrams
Durafet III
Wire
Color
Signal
Name
Cable shield (yellow)
to chassis ground screw
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
RKO res- (Low)
Green
R
KO res- (High)
Green with Black stripe
Drain
Blue
Source
Orange
Substrate
Reference
Red
Black
8
7
Counter
White with Black stripe
Orange with Black stripe
Red with Black stripe
White
Remove pre-wired
jumper at
terminals 5 & 6
RTH 3rd Wire
RTH Low
RTH High
EEGND
6
5
4
3
Black with White stripe
Blue with Black stripe
2
EEDATA
1
Figure 7-2 Terminal Designations for Durafet III Electrode
120
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputs and Outputs Wiring
Durafet II
Wire
Color
Signal
Name
Cable shield (yellow)
to chassis ground screw
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
RKO res- (Low)
RKO res- (High)
Drain
Green
Green with Black stripe
Blue
Source
Orange
Substrate
Reference
Red
Black
8
7
White with Black stripe
Orange with Black stripe
White
Counter
Remove pre-wired
jumper at
terminals 5 & 6
RTH 3rd Wire
RTH Low
RTH High
6
5
Red with Black stripe
4
3
2
1
Figure 7-3 Terminal Designations for Durafet II Electrode
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputs and Outputs Wiring
Glass Meredian II
Wire
Color
Signal
Name
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Reference
Guard
Orange
White with Black stripe
8
Glass (or ORP)
Clear (center conductor of coax)
7
6
Jumper
White
White
5
RTH Low
RTH High
4
3
2
1
Some cables have connectors on the leads.
Cut off the connectors, skin and tin the leads
and then wire to the screw terminals on the boards
Figure 7-4 Terminal Designations for Meredian II Electrode
Wire
Color
Signal
Name
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Orange
Black pigtail of Coax
Reference
Guard
8
Glass (or ORP)
Center conductor of Coax
7
6
Jumper
Green
Red
5
RTH Low
RTH High
4
3
2
Cable shield (Violet)
to chassis ground screw
1
Some cables have connectors on the leads.
Cut off the connectors, skin and tin the leads
and then wire to the screw terminals on the boards
Figure 7-5 Terminal Designations for Meredian II Electrode with Quick Disconnect
122
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputs and Outputs Wiring
ORP
Wire
Color
Signal
Name
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Cable shield (Yellow)
to chassis ground screw
Reference
Guard
Black or Orange
Shield
8
Glass (or ORP)
Red or Clear (center conductor of coax)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Some cables have connectors on the leads.
Cut off the connectors, skin and tin the leads
and then wire to the screw terminals on the boards
Figure 7-6 Terminal Designations for ORP
Wire
Color
Signal
Name
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Cable shield (Violet)
to chassis ground screw
Orange
Reference
Guard
Black pigtail of Coax
8
Center conductor of Coax
Glass (or ORP)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Some cables have connectors on the leads.
Cut off the connectors, skin and tin the leads
and then wire to the screw terminals on the boards
Figure 7-7 Terminal Designations for Direct pH/ORP with
Quick Disconnect Option
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputs and Outputs Wiring
HPW7000
Wire
Color
Signal
Name
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Reference cable shield
(White with Green stripe)
to chassis ground screw
Reference
cable
Reference
Guard
Clear (center conductor of coax)
Measurement
cable shield
(White with Green stripe)
to chassis
White with Black stripe
Measurement
cable
Glass (or ORP)
Counter
Clear (center conductor of coax)
8
7
Red
Jumper
Black
ground screw
RTH 3rd Wire
RTH Low
6
Thermistor
cable
5
RTH High
White
4
Thermistor cable shield
3
(White with Green stripe)
to chassis ground screw
2
1
Some cables have connectors on the leads.
Cut off the connectors, skin and tin the leads
and then wire to the screw terminals on the boards
Figure 7-8 Terminal Designations for HPW7000 System
124
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputs and Outputs Wiring
HB Series pH or ORP
Wire
Color
Signal
Name
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Reference
White pigtail of Coax
8
Center conductor of Coax
Glass (or ORP)
7
Black
Green
Red
6
RTH Sense
RTH Low
RTH High
5
4
3
2
1
Figure 7-9 Terminal Designations for HB Series pH or ORP
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputs and Outputs Wiring
7.5 pH Input from External Preamplifier/Cap Adapter Wiring Diagrams
Glass Meredian External Preamp1
Wire
Color
Signal
Name
2
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
(+) Volt Supply
(–) Volt Supply
Supply Common
Blue
Green
Black
Orange
pH Input Signal
8
7
Jumper terminals 5 and 6
RTH 3rd Wire
RTH Low
6
White
Red
5
4
RTH High
3
2
1
Figure 7-10 Terminal Designations for Meredian Electrode with External
Preamplifier
1 When using 022283 preamplifier module, jumper between “SC” and “ET” at the preamp
2 Color of wires corresponds to Honeywell cables:
Æ 834088
Æ 31075723
Æ 51309677-001
126
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputs and Outputs Wiring
Durafet II External Preamp
Wire
Color
Signal
Name
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
(+) 10 Volt Supply
(-) 10 Volt Supply
Blue
Green
Black
Supply Common
Orange
pH Input Signal
8
7
RTH 3rd Wire
RTH Low
6
Jumper terminals 5 and 6
White
5
4
RTH High
(note: do not connect red wire)
3
2
1
Figure 7-11 Terminal Designations for Durafet II Electrode with External
Preamplifier
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputs and Outputs Wiring
Durafet II Cap Adapter
Wire
Color
Signal
Name
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
(+) 10 Volt Supply
(-) 10 Volt Supply
Supply Common
Blue
Green
Black
Orange
pH Input Signal
8
7
Remove pre-wired
jumper at
terminals 5 & 6
RTH 3rd Wire
RTH Low
6
Red
5
Red with Black stripe
White
4
RTH High
3
2
Cable shield (yellow)
to chassis ground screw
1
Figure 7-12 Terminal Designations for Durafet II Electrode with Cap Adapter
128
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputs and Outputs Wiring
Durafet III Cap Adapter
Wire
Color
Signal
Name
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
(+) 10 Volt Supply
(-) 10 Volt Supply
Supply Common
Blue
Green
Black
Orange
pH Input Signal
8
7
Remove pre-wired
jumper at
terminals 5 & 6
RTH 3rd Wire
RTH Low
6
Red
5
White
4
Red with Black stripe
RTH High
3
2
Cable shield (yellow)
to chassis ground screw
1
Figure 7-13 Terminal Designations for Durafet III Electrode with Cap Adapter
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputs and Outputs Wiring
7.6 Conductivity
4 Wire Cond. 18AWG
(Has no shield)
Wire
Color
Signal
name
10
Cell Low
Black
White
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Cell High
RTH 3rd Wire
RTH Low
Green
Red
RTH High
Wire to chassis
ground screw
Earth Ground
Figure 7-14 Terminal Designations for Conductivity with Integral Cable
4 Wire Cond. 18AWG
(Has no shield)
Wire
Color
Signal
name
10
Cell Low
Yellow
Cable Shield (Violet)
to chassis ground screw
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Center conductor of Coax
Cell High
RTH 3rd Wire
RTH Low
Jumper
Green
Red
RTH High
Brown
Blue
Wire to chassis
ground screw
Earth Ground
Figure 7-15 Terminal Designations for Conductivity Cells with Quick Disconnect
130
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputs and Outputs Wiring
7.7 Dissolved Oxygen
Wire
Color
Signal
Name
Cable shield (Blue)
to chassis ground screw
10
9
Clear
Green
Cathode
Reference
Anode
Red
8
7
Guard
Black*
6
Yellow
Orange
5
RTH Low
RTH High
4
3
2
Wire to chassis
ground screw
1
Earth Ground
* Older Dissolved Oxygen probes may have a
White/Black Guard wire instead of a Black Guard wire.
Some cables have connectors on the leads.
Cut off the connectors, skin and tin the leads
and then wire to the screw terminals on the boards
Figure 7-16 Terminal Designations for Dissolved Oxygen with Integral Cable
CAUTION
When installing the probe, the wiring must be done in the order shown below even if the
analyzer is not powered. This is because the DO Input card is continuously supplying a
voltage (bias) to the terminals.
Connecting – Blue Shield wire first, then in this order:
Red
Green
Coax (clear)
Guard (Black)
Yellow
Orange
Disconnecting – Go in reverse
Orange – first
Yellow
Guard (Black)
Coax (clear)
Green
Red
Blue Shield Wire
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputs and Outputs Wiring
Wire
Color
Signal
Name
Cable shield (Violet)
to chassis ground screw
10
9
Cathode
Reference
Anode
Clear
Orange
8
Yellow
7
Guard
Black Pigtail of Coax
6
Green
Red
5
RTH Low
RTH High
4
3
2
Wire to chassis
ground screw
1
Earth Ground
Some cables have connectors on the leads.
Cut off the connectors, skin and tin the leads
and then wire to the screw terminals on the boards
Figure 7-17 Terminal Designations for Dissolved Oxygen with
Quick Disconnect Option
132
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputs and Outputs Wiring
7.8 Communications Card
RJ45 Ethernet
Connection
4
3
2
1
TX+
TX-
RS 485
Connection
SHIELD
Wire to Chassis
Ground Screw
Figure 7-18 Terminal Designations for Communications Card
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputs and Outputs Wiring
7.9 Outputs
Power Supply/Analog Output/Relay Output Card
13
Analog Output 1 (+)
12
Remove the Jumper
if you are using an
Analog Output
Analog Output 1 (–)
11
Analog Output 2 (+)
10
Analog Output 2 (–)
9
Relay Output 1 (N.O.)
8
Relay Output 1 (COM)
7
Relay Output 1 (N.C.)
6
Relay Output 2 (N.O.)
5
Relay Output 2 (COM)
4
Relay Output 2 (N.C.)
AC Hot L1
AC N L2
1
Case Earth Ground
Grounding Stud
on Case
Figure 7-19 Terminal Designations for Power, Analog Output, and Relay Output
134
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inputs and Outputs Wiring
7.10 Option Card
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Analog Output 3 (+)
Analog Output 3 (–)
Case (earth) Ground
Digital Input 1 (+)*
Digital Input 1 (–)*
Digital Input 2 (+)*
Digital Input 2 (–)*
Case (earth) Ground
Relay Output 3 (N.O.)
Relay Output 3 (COM)
Relay Output 3 (N.C.)
Relay Output 4 (N.O.)
Relay Output 4 (COM)
Relay Output 4 (N.C.)
Case (earth) Ground
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
* Contact Closure only
Figure 7-20 Terminal Designations for Option Board
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
8 Input Calibration
8.1 Overview
Introduction
The section describes the calibration procedures for the following:
Input Cal – calibrate Input 1 and Input 2 for pH/ORP, Conductivity, or Dissolved
Oxygen.
For other Calibration Procedures refer to the sections listed below.
Output Cal – calibrate Analog Output 1, Analog Output 2, and Analog Output 3
(See Section 1).
Temp Input Cal – calibrate Temperature 1 and Temperature 2 for pH/ORP or
Conductivity (See Section 1).
For Calibration History, refer to Section 11.
What’s in this section?
The topics in this section are listed below.
Topic
See Page
136
8.1 Overview
8.2 Calibration Menu
137
8.3 pH/ORP and Conductivity Overview
8.4 Recommendations for Successful Measurement and Calibration
8.5 pH Calibration
138
139
140
8.6 ORP Calibration
151
8.7 Conductivity Calibration
157
8.8 Dissolved Oxygen Calibration
166
136
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
8.2 Calibration Menu
Accessing the Main Calibration Menu and sub-menus
Press Calibrate . The Main Calibration Menu will appear.
CALIBRATION
Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History
Use the
keys to highlight the “Input PV Cal” selection.
Enter
Press
to display the sub-menu for that selection.
Depending on the Input board installed, you can select from:
IN 1 or 2 pH/ORP Cal
IN 1 or 2 Pre pH Cal
IN 1 or 2 Conduc Cal
IN 1 or 2 DO Cal
Use the
keys to highlight the Input selection for calibration.
Refer to the following sections for “calibration instructions”:
8.5 pH Calibration
Page 140
Page 151
Page 157
8.6 ORP Calibration
8.7 Conductivity Calibration
8.8 Dissolved Oxygen Calibration Page 166
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
8.3 pH/ORP and Conductivity Overview
pH/ORP Calibration
Calibration of pH or ORP measuring instruments is necessary because similar electrodes
may produce slightly different potentials in the same solution, requiring a corrective
adjustment at the measuring instrument. Also, electrode outputs change over a period of
time, making periodic recalibration necessary for best performance. Determine
recalibration intervals based on operating experience.
Conductivity
Each type of cell has an associated cell constant entered during Configuration Setup. (See
Section 6.6) This number is part of the cell model number. However, for greater precision,
every Honeywell cell is individually tested at the factory, and a calibration factor unique to
that cell is determined. The cal factor for a cell can be found on the plastic tag hanging
from the cell lead wires. Instructions for entering this cell cal factor are in Section 6.6. The
UDA automatically uploads the Cal Factor from Honeywell cells with EEPROM. This
value is displayed in the “Setup” menu.
For some conductivity applications even greater accuracy is required. For those
applications it is possible to perform a calibration trim procedure. The Analyzer’s reading
can be adjusted while the associated cell is measuring a reference solution of known
conductivity, as described in Section 8.7. The same procedure can be used to adjust the
Analyzer’s reading while the cell is in the process, if a reference instrument is used to
determine the conductivity of the process. In this case the process fluid becomes the
“reference solution”.
Calibration trim is recommended for acid concentration applications above 5%.
Calibration trim can be reset as described in Section 8.7.
For accurate measurement of total dissolved solids (TDS) a conversion factor is entered
for each cell as described in Section 6.6.
ATTENTION
Any time a unit reset is performed; the TDS Value will be reset to 1.0. Calibration trim and cal
factor will be reset for cells.
138
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
8.4 Recommendations for Successful Measurement and Calibration
Selection and care of electrode system or cell essential
Successful measurements and calibration depend upon selection and care of the electrode
system or cells. Always prepare electrodes or cells and their mountings in accordance
with the instructions supplied with them, observing temperature, pressure and flow
limitations. Note the following recommendations:
pH/ORP Calibration
• Rinse electrodes thoroughly between buffer solutions.
• Always use HOLD, or otherwise deactivate control or alarm circuits before removing
electrodes from the process.
• Standardize with a buffer solution, which is at about the same temperature and pH as
the sample solution.
• Inspect and, if necessary, clean and/or rejuvenate the electrode system periodically
according to experience and conditions.
Conductivity Calibration
• For most accurate temperature measurement and compensation, insulate the outer body
of the cell to minimize the effect of ambient conditions on process temperature
measurement.
• Rinse the cells thoroughly with de-ionized water before immersing in a reference
solution.
• Always deactivate control or alarm circuits before removing cells from the process.
• Do calibration trim with a reference solution, which is at about the same temperature
and conductivity as the process solution.
• Inspect and, if necessary, clean the cells periodically according to experience and
conditions.
ATTENTION
For successful measurement in pure water applications where plastic piping is used, you may
have to provide an earth ground for the cell. Run a wire from the black electrode terminal of the
cell to one of the earth ground screws.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
8.5 pH Calibration
8.5.1 Introduction
pH instrument calibration consists of standardization and slope adjustments.
Standardization is a pH Offset adjustment to compensate for electrode drift. Slope
adjustment is a span adjustment to match the gain of the instrument to the electrode output
response. For Durafet III pH electrodes, initial factory default value of offset and slope are
automatically uploaded by the UDA. These values will appear in the “pH/ORP Cal”
screens Table 8-2, step 4.
The analyzer supports two methods of calibration:
• With the “Buffering” method described in this section, you use your electrode
system to measure two reference solutions (“buffers”) having known pH values,
and then adjust the analyzer so that its readings match the actual pH of each.
ATTENTION
The two reference solutions must have a pH difference of at least 2.
• With the “Sample” method described in this section you measure your process,
both with your electrode system and with a separate (accurately calibrated) meter,
then adjust the analyzer so that its reading matches the meter.
ATTENTION
When a Durafet III pH electrode is replaced, its electrode calibration data
needs to be updated by the UDA2182 Analyzer. This is done either by
power cycling the analyzer or using the restart screen.
Using the restart screen
Press
Action
Repeatedly until the One Input or Two Inputs display
Display
screen appears.
You will see:
Was probe replaced?
No
Enter
to change to
Yes
to restart the UDA.
Enter
140
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
8.5.2 Calibrating pH Electrodes Using Automatic Buffer recognition
Analyzer stores information on multiple buffers
The UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer contains (in its permanent memory) information
on several commonly used buffer solution standards in three groups, including the pH
versus temperature characteristics of each.
By command, the instrument will automatically select one of these buffers in the selected
group and use its values in the calibration process. Automatic checks are included to
ensure that reasonable and correct values are entered.
The procedure for using the automatic buffer recognition feature in an actual calibration is
provided in Table 8-2.
The standard pH Buffer values are listed in Table 8-1.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
Calibration functions
Calibrating the pH Offset (Standardization) –. In auto buffer recognition calibration,
you can select one of the other buffer pH values directly above or below the
recognized buffer value in the current buffer group. (See Table 8-1.)
Calibrating the Slope - In auto buffer recognition calibration, you can select one of the
other buffer pH values directly above or below the recognized buffer value in the
current buffer group. (See Table 8-1.)
Table 8-1 Standard pH Buffer Values
Temperature °C
Group Buffer
NIST/USP
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
1.67
4.01
1.67
4.00
1.67
1.67
1.68
1.68
1.68
1.69
1.69
1.70
1.71
1.68
4.01
4.00
6.92
4.00
6.90
4.00
6.88
4.01
6.86
9.18
12.45
2.00
4.00
7.00
10.00
11.88
1.00
3.00
6.00
7.97
9.95
12.83
4.01
6.85
9.14
12.30
2.00
4.01
6.99
9.94
11.79
1.01
2.99
6.00
7.94
9.90
12.68
4.02
6.84
9.10
12.13
2.00
4.02
6.98
9.90
11.66
1.01
2.99
6.01
7.91
9.86
12.53
4.03
6.84
9.07
11.99
2.00
4.03
6.97
9.85
11.53
1.01
2.98
6.02
7.88
9.82
12.38
4.04
6.83
9.04
11.84
2.00
4.04
6.97
9.82
11.43
1.01
2.98
6.04
7.87
9.78
12.25
4.06
6.83
9.01
11.71
2.00
4.06
6.97
9.78
11.32
1.02
2.97
6.05
7.86
9.74
12.11
6.98
6.95
6.86
9.46
9.40
9.33
9.28
9.23
9.18
13.42
2.01
13.21
2.01
13.01
2.01
12.80
2.00
12.64
2.00
12.45
2.00
USA
4.01
3.99
4.00
3.99
4.00
4.00
7.13
7.10
7.07
7.05
7.02
7.00
10.34
12.60
0.98
10.26
12.44
0.98
10.19
12.28
0.99
10.12
12.14
0.99
10.06
12.00
1.00
10.00
12.00
1.00
Europe
3.02
3.02
3.02
3.02
3.00
3.00
6.03
6.02
6.01
6.00
6.00
6.00
8.15
8.11
8.07
8.03
8.00
8.00
10.22
13.81
10.17
13.60
10.12
13.39
10.05
13.19
10.00
13.00
10.00
13.00
142
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
Procedure
Make sure you have selected “PV Type –pH Glass, pH Durafet, or pH HPW” in the Inputs
configuration -Table 6-5.
Refer to Section 6.4.1 – General Rules for Editing.
Table 8-2 Calibrating pH Electrodes Using Automatic Buffer Recognition
Step
1
Action
Screen
Prepare containers of two
standard reference solutions.
2
CALIBRATION
Calibrate
Press
Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History
Use
to select
Input PV Cal
3
PV INPUT CAL
In 1 pH/ORP Cal
Enter
Press
In 2 Conduc Cal
Use
to select
Input 1 or 2 pH/ORP Cal
4
IN 1 pH/ORP Cal
Enter
Press
Auto Buffer Cal
Buffer Cal
Sample Cal
Buffer Group
pH Offset
pH Slope
Reset pH Offset
Reset pH Slope
Use
to select
”Buffer Group”
5
Use
to select
NIST/USP (default)
USA, or
Enter
Press
Europe
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
Step
6
Action
Enter
Screen
IN 1 pH/ORP Cal
Press
Auto Buffer Cal
Buffer Cal
Sample Cal
Buffer Group
pH Offset
pH Slope
Reset pH Offset
Reset pH Slope
Use
to select
”Auto Buffer Cal”
7
•
•
•
Put the unit in “Hold”
mode
Remove the electrode
from the process.
Rinse the electrode
thoroughly with distilled or
de-ionized water
8
Calibrating the pH Offset
“Place probe in Buffer 1”
The display will show the pH of
the buffer 1 solution as
measured by the electrode
system.
The reading will be automatically
adjusted to match the known pH
value stored in the UDA2182
memory.
Enter
Press
Follow the prompts at the top
and bottom of the screen.
“Press Enter when stable”
Once the reading is stable
9
“Buffer 1 stability check”
Use
the Buffer.
to change the value of
Enter
Press
“Up/Down changes Buffer”
Rinse the electrode thoroughly
with distilled or de-ionized
water
10
11
Calibrating the Slope
“Place probe in Buffer 2”
The display will show the pH of
the buffer 2 solution as
measured by the electrode
system.
The reading will be automatically
adjusted to match the known pH
value stored in the UDA2182
memory.
Enter
Press
Follow the prompts at the top
and bottom of the screen.
“Press Enter when stable”
144
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
Step
12
Action
Screen
“Buffer 2 stability check”
Use to change the value of
Once the reading is stable
Enter
Press
the Buffer.
“Up/Down changes Buffer”
Error Messages:
If the calibration fails, an error
message will be displayed
across the bottom stripe of the
screen.
13
Buffer span too low
OFFSET UNDERRANGE
OFFSET OVERRANGE
Slope underrange
Make necessary adjustments
and re-calibrate.
Slope overrange
Solution Unstable
Temp Too Low
Temp too High
See Table 12-2 for definitions
8.5.3 Buffering Method of Calibrating pH Electrodes
Recommended for most applications
This technique is recommended for best accuracy in most applications.
Materials
Materials required are:
• Two standard buffer reference solutions that are at least 2 pH apart from one another.
• A container for each, large enough to immerse the electrode to measuring depth.
• Distilled or de-ionized water to rinse the electrode.
Procedure
Make sure you have selected “PV Type –pH Glass, pH Durafet, or pH HPW ” in the
Inputs configuration - Table 6-5.
Refer to Section 6.4.1 – General Rules for Editing.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
Table 8-3 Procedure for Buffering Method of Calibrating pH Electrodes
Step
1
Action
Screen
CALIBRATION
Calibrate
Input PV Cal
Press
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History
Use
to select
Input PV Cal
PV INPUT CAL
In 1 pH/ORP Cal
2
Enter
Press
In 2 Conduc Cal
Use
to select
Input 1 or 2 pH/ORP Cal
IN 1 pH/ORP Cal
3
Enter
Auto Buffer Cal
Buffer Cal
Press
Sample Cal
Buffer Group
pH Offset
pH Slope
Reset pH Offset
Reset pH Slope
Use
to select
Buffer Cal
4
•
•
•
Put the unit in “Hold”
mode
Remove the electrode
from the process.
Rinse the electrode
thoroughly with distilled or
de-ionized water
Standardization (adjust
instrument zero)
5
“Place probe in Buffer 1”
The display will show the pH of
the buffer 1 solution as
measured by the electrode
system.
Enter
Press
Follow the prompts at the top
and bottom of the screen.
“Press Enter when stable”
146
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
Step
6
Action
Screen
“Change to Buffer 1 value”
Use to change the value to
match the actual pH of the
Buffer 1 solution at its current
temperature.
Once the reading is stable
Enter
Press
“Enter to save, Exit to cancel”
Rinse the electrode thoroughly
with distilled or de-ionized
water.
7
8
Percent Theoretical Slope
Adjustment
“Place probe in Buffer 2”
The display will show the pH of
the buffer 2 solution as
measured by the electrode
system.
Enter
Press
Follow the prompts at the top
and bottom of the screen.
“Press Enter when stable”
Once the reading is stable
9
“Change to Buffer 2 value”
Use
to change the value to
Enter
Press
match the actual pH of the Buffer
2 solution at its current
temperature.
“Enter to save, Exit to cancel”
Error Messages:
If the calibration fails, an error
message will be displayed
across the bottom stripe of the
screen.
10
Buffer span too low
Slope (Percent Theoretical
Slope) underrange
Make necessary adjustments
and re-calibrate
Slope(Percent Theoretical
Slope) overrange
Solution Unstable
See Table 12-2 for definitions
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
8.5.4 Sample Method of Calibrating pH Electrodes
Recommended where pH is stable, or for high-purity water applications
This method is recommended only where the pH is stable and changes very slowly. It is
also recommended for high-purity water measurement applications. Special instructions
for high-purity water applications are provided below.
Materials
To use the sample method, follow the instructions in Table 8-4.
Materials required are:
• A clean beaker for collecting the sample.
• A calibrated portable instrument for measuring pH of the sample.
• Distilled or de-ionized water to rinse the electrode.
Procedure
Make sure you have selected “PV Type –pH Glass, pH Durafet, or pH HPW” in the Inputs
configuration - Table 6-5.
Refer to Section 6.4.1 – General Rules for Editing.
Table 8-4 Procedure for Sample Method of Calibrating pH Electrodes
Step
Action
Screen
Prepare the Calibration meter.
1
2
CALIBRATION
Calibrate
Press
Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History
Use
to select
Input PV Cal
PV INPUT CAL
In 1 pH/ORP Cal
3
Enter
Press
In 2 Conduc Cal
Use
to select
Input 1 or 2 pH/ORP Cal
148
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
Step
4
Action
Enter
Screen
IN 1 pH/ORP Cal
Auto Buffer Cal
Buffer Cal
Press
Sample Cal
Buffer Group
pH Offset
pH Slope
Reset pH Offset
Reset pH Slope
Use
to select
Sample Cal
5
•
•
Put the unit in “Hold”
mode
DO NOT Remove the
electrode from the
process.
6
7
“Place probe in Sample”
The display will show the pH of
the process as measured by the
electrode system.
Enter
Press
Follow the prompts at the top
and bottom of the screen.
“Press Enter when stable”
Collect a beaker of the process sample from a point near the
electrode mounting and measure its pH value with a calibrated
portable instrument.
Special instructions for high-purity water applications
For a high purity water application, do not remove the sample
from the process for measurement. Bring the portable instrument
to the sampling site and measure a continuously flowing sample
that has not been exposed to air. This prevents lowering the
sample pH by absorption of carbon dioxide from the air.
Once the reading is stable,
8
9
Change to Sample Value”
Use keys to change the
displayed value to match the
value on the portable meter.
Enter
press
“Enter to save, Exit to cancel”
If the calibration fails, an error Error Messages:
message will be displayed
across the bottom stripe of the
See Table 12-2.
screen.
Make necessary adjustments
and re-calibrate
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
8.5.5 Viewing and resetting pH Offset and (Standardization) pH Slope
If the calibration is suspect, you can reset the pH Offset and pH Slope and calibrate again.
In the same screen as “Sample Cal”, use the
“Reset pH Slope”.
keys to highlight “Reset pH Offset” or
IN 1 pH/ORP Cal
Auto Buffer Cal
Buffer Cal
Sample Cal
Buffer Group
pH Offset
(Read only)
(Read only)
pH Slope
Reset pH Offset
Reset pH Slope
Figure 8-1 Resetting pH Offset and pH Slope
Press ENTER. The pH Offset or pH Slope will be reset to (Factory calibration default for
Durafet III).
150
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
8.6 ORP Calibration
8.6.1 Introduction
ORP calibration consists of adjusting the reading of the analyzer to match a known value.
There are two types of ORP calibration supported:
• To calibrate the system to compensate for changes in electrode potentials over time,
the ORP electrode is placed in a reference solution of known ORP value, and the
analyzer reading is adjusted to match this value, as described in Section 8.6.
Instructions for preparing standard solutions are also provided below. These solutions
are stable for only short periods of time (less than 8 hours) and are only
approximations of ORP potentials.
• To calibrate the UDA2182 only, not the whole system including electrodes, apply a
known millivolt signal to the Analyzer instead of input from the electrode, then adjust
the UDA2182 reading to match the actual millivolt input, as described in Table 8-7.
8.6.2 ORP Calibration Using Reference Solution
Recommended to adjust for changes in electrode potential over time
An ORP measuring system can be checked by measuring a solution having a known
oxidation-reduction potential, then adjusting the UDA2182 to match. Although a
reference solution provides only an approximation of ORP potential, the system can be
adjusted periodically to compensate for changes in electrode potential over time.
Materials
The materials required to use the ORP standardization method are:
• A solution with a known oxidation-reduction potential. (See “Instructions for
preparing solution” below.
• A container for the solution, large enough to immerse the electrode to measuring
depth.
• Distilled or de-ionized water to rinse the electrode.
Instructions for preparing solution
To prepare an ORP standardization solution, dissolve 0.1 g of quinhydrone powder in
5 cc of acetone or methyl alcohol (methanol). Add this to not more than 500 cc of a
standard pH reference solution (buffer), about 1 part saturated quinhydrone to 100 parts
buffer solution. The oxidation potential of this solution is listed below for several
temperatures. The polarity sign shown is that of the measuring element with respect to the
reference element.
These solutions are unstable and should be used within eight hours of preparation.
All mV values in Table 8-5 have a ± 30 mV tolerance.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
Table 8-5 Oxidation-Reduction Potential of Reference Solutions
at Specified Temperature
pH Buffer Solution
Temperature
(Honeywell Part Number)
20 °C
267 mV
100 mV
92 mV
25 °C
30 °C
263 mV
94 mV
259 mV
88 mV
80 mV
–39 mV
–49 mV
4.01 @ 25 °C (31103001)
6.86 @ 25 °C (31103002)
86 mV
7.00 @ 25 °C (not available from Honeywell)
9.00 @ 25 °C **(not available from Honeywell)
9.18 @ 25 °C (31103003)
–26 mV
–36 mV
–32 mV
–43 mV
Procedure
Make sure you have selected “PV Type –ORP” in the Inputs configuration – Table
6-5
Refer to Section 6.4.1 – General Rules for Editing.
Table 8-6 Procedure for Calibrating ORP System Using a Reference Solution
Step
1
Action
Screen
CALIBRATION
Calibrate
Press
Press
Press
Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History
Use
to select
Input PV Cal
PV INPUT CAL
In 1 pH/ORP Cal
2
Enter
In 2 Conduc Cal
Use
to select
Input 1 or 2 pH/ORP Cal
IN 1 pH/ORP Cal
Sample Cal
3
Enter
ORP Offset
0.000
Reset ORP Offset
152
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
Step
4
Action
Screen
Put the unit in “Hold” mode
Remove the electrode from
the process.
Rinse the electrode
thoroughly with distilled or de-
ionized water
5
6
Enter
Press
Follow the prompts at the top
and bottom of the screen.
“Place probe in Sample”
The display will show the
Oxidation Reduction Potential of
the reference solution as
measured by the electrode
system.
“Press Enter when stable”
Once the reading is stable
7
“Change to Sample value”
Use
to change the value to
Enter
Press
match the actual oxidation-
reduction potential of the
reference solution at its current
temperature.
“Enter to save, Exit to cancel”
This will standardize the unit.
8
Enter
Press
Take the unit out of “Hold” and
return to the calibration menu.
9
If the calibration fails, an error
message will be displayed
across the bottom stripe of the
screen.
10
Error Messages
Refer to Table 12-2.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
8.6.3 ORP Calibration Using Voltage Input
Calibrates Analyzer only
The procedure described in this sub-section calibrates the Analyzer only. It does not
involve compensating for electrode drift. Instead, a known millivolt signal is applied to
the analyzer input terminals in place of the signal from the electrode, and the UDA2182 is
adjusted so that its reading matches the known input.
ATTENTION
This procedure can only be used when measuring ORP only
Materials
The materials required to calibrate the Analyzer using a voltage input are:
• A source of a known millivolt signal.
• A screwdriver to fit the Analyzer input terminal screws and the terminal retainer.
Procedure
Make sure you have selected “PV Type –ORP” in the Inputs configuration – Table 6-5.
Refer to Section 6.4.1 – General Rules for Editing.
To calibrate the ORP Analyzer using Voltage Input, follow the instructions in Table 8-7.
WARNING
This procedure should be performed by qualified personnel only. Disconnect the power
before opening the instrument case. A potentially lethal shock hazard exists inside the case if
the unit is opened while powered. More than one switch may be required to disconnect power.
Table 8-7 Procedure for Calibrating ORP Analyzer Using Voltage Input
Step
1
Action
Screen
Turn off the power to the Analyzer. More than one switch may be
required to disconnect power.
With the power off open the case:
2
3
Loosen the four captive screws on the front of the bezel.
Grasp the bezel on the right side. Lift the bezel gently and swing
the bezel open to the left. (The bezel and display assembly is
mounted on pivot arms.)
Refer to Figure 7-1 for the location of the terminal board retainer.
Loose the screws that hold the retainer and slide the retainer right
or left until the retainer tabs disengage from the terminal boards.
154
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
Step
4
Action
Screen
Insert a screwdriver into the tab in the terminal board to be wired
and pull. Slide the board half way out. There is a notch in the
terminal board into which you can slide the retainer tabs and hold
the boards in place while wiring.
Label and remove the input wiring from the input terminals.
Terminals 8 and 10.
(See Figure 7-6 Terminal Designations for ORP).
5
6
Feeding the test wiring through the conduit hole in the case,
connect a voltage supply to the 8 and 10 input terminals
• To apply a signal in the range 0 to 1600 mV, connect the plus to
8 and the minus to 10.
• To apply a signal in the range -1 to -1600 mV, connect the plus
to 10 and the minus to 8.
Slide the Input board back and close the case and power up the
unit. Do not apply power until the case is closed.
PV INPUT CAL
Calibrate
7
Press
In 1 pH/ORP Cal
In 2 Conduc Cal
Use
to select
Input 1 or 2 pH/ORP Cal
IN 1 pH/ORP Cal
Sample Cal
8
Enter
Press
ORP Offset
0.000
Reset ORP Offset
9
•
Put the unit in “Hold”
mode
The display will show the
Oxidation Reduction Potential in
Millivolts.
10
Enter
Press
The value should match the
Input signal.
Ignore the instructions to put the electrode in the reference
solution. Instead, apply an appropriate millivolt signal
(between –2000 and 2000 mV) to the input terminals.
11
To obtain a negative value, you must reverse the input to the unit
as described in Step 5.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
Step
12
Action
Screen
Once the reading is stable, if it
does not match the input
“Change to Sample value”
Use
to change the value to
match the Voltage being applied
to the input terminals.
Enter
signal, press
“Enter to save, Exit to cancel”
This will standardize the unit.
13
Enter
Press
Take the unit out of “Hold” and return to the calibration menu.
14
15
Turn off the voltage source and turn off power to the Analyzer.
Do not open the case until power is disconnected.
Reconnect field wiring removed in Step 5.
Re-insert the terminal board into the case.
16
17
18
Close the case and power up the unit. Do not apply power until
case is closed.
8.6.4 Viewing and Resetting ORP Offset
If the calibration is suspect, you can reset the ORP Offset and calibrate again.
In the same screen as “Sample Cal”, use the
keys to highlight “Reset ORP Offset”.
IN 1 pH/ORP Cal
Sample Cal
ORP Offset
(Read only)
Reset ORP Offset
Figure 8-2 Resetting ORP Offset
Press ENTER. The ORP Offset will be reset to 0.000 (default).
156
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
8.7 Conductivity Calibration
8.7.1 Introduction
Each type of cell has an associated cell constant entered during Configuration setup (see
Section 6.6). This number is part of the cell model number. However, for greater
precision, every Honeywell cell is individually tested at the factory, and a calibration
factor unique to that cell is determined. The cal factor for a cell can be found on the plastic
tag hanging from the cell lead wires. Instructions for entering this cell cal factor are in
Section 6.6. The UDA automatically uploads the Cal Factor from Honeywell DL4XXX
type cells. This value is displayed in the “Setup” menu.
For some conductivity applications even greater accuracy is required. For those
applications it is possible to perform a calibration trim procedure. The Analyzer’s reading
can be adjusted while the associated cell is measuring a reference solution of known
conductivity, as described in Table 8-9. The same procedure can be used to adjust the
Analyzer’s reading while the cell is in the process, if a reference instrument is used to
determine the conductivity of the process. In this case the process fluid becomes the
“reference solution”.
Calibration trim is recommended for acid concentration applications above 5%.
Calibration trim can be removed as described in this section.
For accurate measurement of total dissolved solids (TDS) a conversion factor is entered
for each cell as described in Table 6-5 (Input1, Input 2, Conductivity).
8.7.2 Entering the Cal Factor for each cell
Introduction
Each type of cell has an associated cell constant; this number is part of the cell model
number. The constant for each cell is entered during Input setup. However, for greater
precision, every Honeywell cell is individually tested at the factory, and a calibration
factor unique to that cell is determined. The cal factor for a cell can be found on the
plastic tag hanging from the cell lead wires.
Procedure
If you have not done so already, refer to Table 6-5 (Input1/Input2/Conductivity) to enter
the cal factor for each cell
8.7.3 Determining and Entering the TDS Conversion Factor
Introduction
The UDA2182 measures conductivity. However, the process value can be displayed in
terms of total dissolved solids (TDS). If a TDS PV type was specified during Input setup
(Section 6.6), then the same menu in will contain an entry for the TDS conversion factor
for each cell.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
8.7.4 Determining TDS conversion factor
To determine the TDS conversion factor, it is first necessary to establish the total
dissolved solids in a representative sample of the process. The formal determination of
TDS is a laboratory standard method performed on a weighed grab sample of the process
fluid. To summarize how to obtain a TDS value:
• Suspended solids, if present, are filtered out.
• All water is evaporated.
• The residue is dried and weighed.
• The result is divided by the original sample weight to obtain ppm TDS.
For detailed guidance in determining the official TDS, see “Standard Methods for the
Examination of Water and Wastewater,” jointly published by the American Public Health
Association, American Water Works Association and Water Pollution Control Federation,
Washington, DC.
To determine the conversion factor needed by the Analyzer, first use the laboratory
procedure summarized above to give an official TDS value. Next divide the TDS value by
the conductivity of the sample to yield the conversion factor for that particular process
fluid. The conversion factor is then entered into the analyzer to normalize the TDS
readout.
With power plant cation conductivity measurements, ion chromatography results may be
used to establish the conversion factor for readout in ppb chloride or sulfate ion. Nominal
values are 83 ppb per μS/cm for chloride ion and 111 ppb per μS/cm for sulfate ion. The
analyzer does not provide temperature compensation in TDS for chloride or sulfate ions.
Out-of range-values forced to closest limit
As long as the entered TDS value is within the acceptable limits for a given cell constant,
the Analyzer accepts the value. If a value is outside the accepted range, the unit will not
display an error message; instead it will force the value to either the high or low limit of
the range of the cell constant. Refer to Table 6-5 (Input1/Input2/Conductivity) for TDS
conversion factor defaults.
Calibrate the Analyzer before entering TDS conversion factor
If you intend to enter a cal factor or use calibration trim, do so before entering the TDS
conversion factor as described here.
If you use calibration trim, first set the solution temperature compensation in Table 6-5 to
the non-TDS choice for your process. For example, if you plan to use “NaCl” set the
solution temperature compensation type to “NaCl” temporarily for calibration purposes.
(Solution temperature compensation type is the one Input setup parameter that can be
changed without triggering a cold reset.)
Next, perform the calibration. Once calibration has been completed, go back to Input setup
and set the solution temperature compensation type to the TDS choice, for example
“NaCl”.
At this point you are ready to enter the TDS conversion factor as described in Table 6-5.
158
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
8.7.5 Performing Calibration Trim
Introduction
For most applications entering the cal factor for each cell will achieve satisfactory system
performance. However, it is possible to perform a calibration trim procedure in which the
Analyzer and cell combination are used to measure a reference solution of known
conductivity; the reading of the Analyzer is adjusted to match.
The same procedure can be used to adjust the Analyzer’s reading while the cell is in the
process, if a reference instrument is used to determine the process conductivity. In this
case, the process fluid becomes the “reference solution”.
Calibration trim is recommended for acid concentration measurements above 5%.
Materials
To perform calibration trim using a standard reference solution, follow the instructions in
Table 8-9.
Materials required are:
• A reference solution of known conductivity near the point of interest, with the
temperature controlled (or measured and compensated) to within ± 1 °C.
Conductivities of potassium chloride solutions are provided in Table 8-8. Solutions
must be prepared with high-purity de-ionized, CO2-free water, and dried potassium
chloride.
• For acid concentration applications, a certified reagent grade solution with the
temperature controlled.
• A container for the reference solution, large enough to immerse the cell to measuring
depth.
• De-ionized water to rinse the cell.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
Table 8-8 Conductivity of Potassium Chloride Solutions at 25 °C
Concentration M*
Conductivity (microSiemens
per cm)
0.001
0.005
0.01
147.0
717.8
1,413
2,767
6,668
0.02
0.05
* M = Molarity; 1M = 74.555g potassium chloride per liter of solution
Procedure
Table 8-9 Procedure for Performing Calibration Trim Using a Reference Solution
Step
1
Action
Screen
CALIBRATION
Calibrate
Press
Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History
PV INPUT CAL
2
Enter
In 1 pH/ORP Cal
In 2 Conduc Cal
Press
Use
to select
Input 1 or 2 Conduc Cal
IN2 Conduc Cal
Sample Cal
3
4
Enter
Press
Cal Trim
1.00
Reset Cal Trim
•
•
Remove the cell from the
process.
Rinse the cell thoroughly
with de-ionized water.
160
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
Step
5
Action
Enter
Screen
Press
Follow the prompts at the top
and bottom of the screen.
6
7
8
“Place probe in Sample”
The display will show the
conductivity of the reference
solution as measured by the cell
and Analyzer system.
“Press Enter when stable”
Once the reading is stable,
“Change to Sample value”
Use
to change the value to
Enter
Press
match the actual conductivity of
the reference solution at its
current temperature.
“Enter to save, Exit to cancel”
This will save the Calibration
Trim Value. If the calibration trim
adjustment is successful, the
calibration menu will again be
displayed.
Enter
Press
Return the cell to the process.
Repeat the operation for the
other cell.
If the calibration fails, an error
message will be displayed
across the bottom stripe of the
screen.
9
Error Messages
Refer to Table 12-2.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
8.7.6 Resetting Calibration Trim
If the calibration is suspect, you can reset the Calibration Trim and calibrate again.
In the same screen as “Sample Cal”, use the
keys to highlight “Reset Trim”.
IN2 Conduc Cal
Sample Cal
Cal Trim
1.00
Reset Cal Trim
Figure 8-3 Resetting Calibration Trim
Press ENTER. The Calibration Trim will be reset to 1.00 (default).
162
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
8.7.7 Cation pH Calibration
The UDA allows for a sample calibration of the specific or influent pH value. Here an
independent sample is withdrawn from the sampling equipment and pH is determined with
equipment of known accuracy. This independent pH value is then entered into the UDA
as a pH calibration constant.
Recommended where pH is stable, or for high-purity water applications
This method is recommended only where the pH is stable and changes very slowly. It is
also recommended for high-purity water measurement applications. Special instructions
for high-purity water applications are provided below.
Materials
To use the sample method, follow the instructions in Table 8-4.
Materials required are:
• A clean beaker for collecting the sample.
• A calibrated portable instrument for measuring pH of the sample.
• Distilled or de-ionized water to rinse the electrode.
Procedure
Make sure both inputs are “Conductivity”.
Refer to Section 6.4.1 – General Rules for Editing.
Table 8-10 Procedure for Sample Method of Calibrating Cation pH
Step
Action
Screen
Prepare the Calibration meter.
1
2
CALIBRATION
Calibrate
Press
Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History
Use
to select
Input PV Cal
3
Enter
Press
Input 1 Conduc
Input 2 Conduc
Cation pH
Use
to select
Cation pH
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
Step
4
Action
Enter
Screen
CATION PH
Press
Sample Cal
pH Offset
0.00
Rst pH Offset
Use
to select
Sample Cal
5
6
•
DO NOT Remove the
electrode from the
process.
Once the reading is stable,
Change to Sample Value”
Use keys to change the
displayed value to match the
value on the portable meter.
Enter
press
“Enter to save, Exit to cancel”
“Cal Complete”
Follow the prompts at the top
and bottom of the screen.
7
8
To recalibrate, press “Enter”.
“Enter = recal, Exit = exit”
If the calibration fails, an error Error Messages:
message will be displayed
See Table 12-2.
across the bottom stripe of the
screen.
Make necessary adjustments
and re-calibrate.
164
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
8.7.8 Resetting pH Offset
If the calibration is suspect, you can reset the Ph Offset and calibrate again.
In the same screen as “Sample Cal”, use the
CATION PH
keys to highlight “Rst pH Offset”.
Sample Cal
pH Offset
0.00
Rst pH Offset
Figure 8-4 Resetting pH Offset
Press ENTER. The pH Offset will be reset to 0.00 (default).
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
8.8 Dissolved Oxygen Calibration
Overview
The analyzer supports three methods of Dissolved Oxygen calibration:
Air Calibration - is done with the probe removed from the process. This is the
recommended method of calibration and should be completed unless the process set-up
prohibits removing the probe. This is recommended prior to installation as it saves
system parameters that are used in optimizing error diagnostics.
If the probe has just been removed from a sample low in dissolved oxygen, it takes
longer to complete a calibration than that of a probe that is already near ambient
conditions (sample high in dissolved oxygen).
Sample Calibration - Sample calibration allows a calibration based on a known
dissolved oxygen concentration where a DO value may be entered that is based on a
reference measurement. Sample calibration is usually executed by leaving the probe in
the measured sample and adjusting the Analyzer to agree with the sample dissolved
oxygen measured with a properly calibrated portable dissolved oxygen meter whose
probe is held very close to the process probe.
For those situations where sample calibration is preferred, it is recommended that an
Air Calibration be performed before the probe is put into service. It is also good
practice to Air Calibrate the probe once every 2 - 4 months of service.
Pressure Compensation - The concentration of oxygen dissolved in air-saturated
water depends on the air pressure. This dependence is automatically compensated for
during air calibration using a pressure sensor built into the Analyzer. The purpose of
the pressure calibration is to insure that the atmospheric oxygen level is known at the
time of air calibration. Pressure compensation is only employed at the time of Air
Calibration.
In this section there is also a procedure for running a Probe Bias Scan.
Do’s and Don’ts for Dissolved Oxygen Calibration
Do check the key parameters on the Display screen before performing an air
calibration for the first time. The parameters should be within the following ranges:
Pressure: 500 to 800 mmHg
Salinity: 0.0 if not being used
Temperature should be a stable reading
Don’t perform a probe bias test while the probe is in normal measurement service.
Don’t perform an air calibration while the probe is in either the ppm or ppb process
water.
Don’t perform a sample calibration when the Dissolved Oxygen reading is in the 0.0 -
2.0 ppb range.
Don’t measure the dissolved oxygen in gas streams or air streams. This product
measures dissolved oxygen in water.
166
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
Calibrating a Dissolved Oxygen Probe Using Air Calibration Method
Introduction
This is the simplest and most commonly used method of calibration.
ATTENTION
If “Initial Installation”, power probe and analyzer for 24 hours before first air calibration.
1. Assure that the probe has been powered for at least one hour.
2. Press the Hold button, if required.
3. Expose the probe to air (or air-saturated water) until the temperature and DO value
reading stabilizes.
Procedure
Table 8-11 Calibrating a Dissolved Oxygen Probe Using Air Calibration Method
Step
1
Action
Screen
CALIBRATION
Calibrate
Press
Press
Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History
2
PV INPUT CAL
Enter
In 1 DO Cal
Use
to select
Input 1 or 2 DO Cal
3
IN1 DO CAL
Enter
Press
Air Cal
Sample Cal
Reset Cal Factor
Pressure Cal
Pressure Offset
Reset Prs Offset
Bias Scan
Bias Volts
Reset Bias Volts
Use
to select
Air Cal
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
Step
4
Action
Enter
Screen
“Place probe in air”
The display will show the live
Dissolved Oxygen value.
Press
Follow the prompts at the top
and bottom of the screen.
Press Enter when ready”
“Cal stability check”
5
Enter
Press
This screen remains until the Air
Calibration is complete. At that
time the previous screen is
displayed indicating that the air
calibration is complete.
“Wait for cal complete”
“ Cal Complete”
6
7
This screen gives you an option
to exit or recalibrate.
Press ENTER to recalibrate.
Press EXIT to return to Input Cal
Screen.
If the calibration fails, an error
message will be displayed
across the bottom stripe of the
screen.
Error Messages
Readings Unstable
Cal Factor Underrange
Cal Factor Overrange
Refer to Table 12-2.
Air Calibration is not completed until both the probe temperature and the probe signal are
stable. If the probe has just been removed from a sample low in dissolved oxygen or with
temperature significantly different from the air temperature, it takes longer to reach stability
than if the probe were already near ambient conditions when calibration was initiated.
168
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
Calibrating a Dissolved Oxygen Probe Using Sample Calibration Method
Introduction
Sample calibration allows a calibration based on a known dissolved oxygen concentration.
It is similar to air calibration except that the known DO value may be entered. Assuming
an accurate reference is available, use the sample calibration method rather than air
calibration if any of the following conditions apply:
• The air is below freezing (32°F, 0°C), or hot (above 104°F, 40°C) or very dry (below
20% relative humidity).
• The probe is mounted such that it is much easier to measure the concentration of the
DO in the water independently than to expose the probe to air. Such mounting is not
recommended but is sometimes necessary.
• The measurement interruption for air calibration cannot be tolerated.
Sample calibration is usually executed by leaving the probe in the measured sample and
adjusting the analyzer to agree with the sample dissolved oxygen measured with a
properly calibrated portable dissolved oxygen meter whose probe is held very close to the
probe of the analyzer. Alternatively, the probe may be removed from the measured sample
and placed in a sample of known dissolved oxygen concentration.
Procedure
Table 8-12 Calibrating a Dissolved Oxygen Probe Using Sample Calibration
Method
Step
1
Action
Screen
Power the probe for at least
one hour. (power the probe for
24 hours if initial installation)
CALIBRATION
2
3
Calibrate
Press
Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History
PV INPUT CAL
Enter
Press
In 1 DO Cal
Use
to select
Input 1 or 2 DO Cal
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
Step
4
Action
Enter
Screen
IN1 DO CAL
Air Cal
Press
Sample Cal
Reset Cal Factor
Pressure Cal
Pressure Offset
Reset Prs Offset
Bias Scan
Bias Volts
Reset Bias Volts
Use
to select
Sample Cal
5
6
•
Put the unit in “Hold”
mode, if required.
“Place probe in sample”
Immerse the probe in the sample
of known DO concentration and
wait until the DO reading is
stable.
Enter
Press
Follow the prompts at the top
and bottom of the screen.
“Press Enter when stable”
Once the reading is stable,
7
Change to sample value”
Use the arrow keys to change
the displayed value to match the
value of the known sample DO
concentration.
Enter
press
“Enter to save” when the value
displayed equals the known
sample DO concentration.
Exit to cancel”
8
“ Cal Complete”
Enter
Press
This screen gives you an option
to exit or recalibrate.
Press ENTER to recalibrate.
Press EXIT to return to Input Cal
Screen.
9
Enter
Press
If the calibration fails, an error
message will be displayed
across the bottom stripe of the
screen.
10
Error Messages:
Cal Factor Underrange
Cal Factor Overrange
See Table 12-2.
Make necessary adjustments
and re-calibrate.
170
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
Calibrating the Integral Pressure Sensor
Introduction
The concentration of oxygen dissolved in air-saturated water depends on the barometric
pressure. This dependence is automatically compensated for during air calibration using a
pressure sensor built into the Analyzer. The purpose of the pressure calibration is to
calibrate that pressure sensor. However, this sensor has been factory calibrated and should
not require re-calibration.
Procedure
Determine the true ambient barometric pressure, such as from a calibrated pressure
transmitter or a mercury barometer. Absolute barometric pressure is required - not the
“relative” sea-level pressure normally reported by the weather bureau.
Table 8-13 Calibrating the Integral Pressure Sensor
Step
1
Action
Screen
CALIBRATION
Calibrate
Press
Press
Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History
PV INPUT CAL
2
Enter
In 1 DO Cal
Use
to select
Input 1 or 2 DO Cal
IN1 DO CAL
3
Enter
Air Cal
Press
Sample Cal
Reset Cal Factor
Pressure Cal
Pressure Offset
Reset Prs Offset
Bias Scan
Bias Volts
Reset Bias Volts
Use
to select
Pressure Cal
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
Step
4
Action
Enter
Screen
“Pressure Sensor Cal”
Display shows the barometric
pressure value in mm Hg.
Press
Follow the prompts at the top
and bottom of the screen.
“Press Enter when stable”
Once the reading is stable,
5
6
Change to sample value”
Use the arrow keys to change
the displayed value until the
displayed pressure in mmHg
agrees with the known pressure.
Enter
press
“Enter to save, Exit to cancel”
“ Cal Complete”
This screen gives you an option
to exit or recalibrate.
Press ENTER to recalibrate.
Press EXIT to return to Input Cal
Screen.
If the calibration fails, an error
message will be displayed
across the bottom stripe of the
screen.
7
Error Messages:
See Table 12-2.
Make necessary adjustments
and re-calibrate.
Running a Probe Bias Scan
Introduction
The dissolved oxygen probe is an electrochemical cell, which produces an electric current
that is directly proportional to the concentration of oxygen dissolved in the sample in
which the probe tip is immersed. (When the probe is in air, the current is identical to that
produced when the probe is in air-saturated water.) This current is a direct measurement of
oxygen level. Usually, the probe is operated at -0.55V with respect to a reference electrode
within the probe. (The minus sign is omitted from the screen as well as from the
following discussion.) However, in some applications, the performance of the DO probe
can be enhanced by using other bias voltages. The purpose of this test is to evaluate
whether the probe bias voltage should be adjusted. Possible interference with probe
performance may also be inferred from the Probe Bias Test (PBT).
Test initiation
When the test is initiated, the bias voltage is adjusted down from its original value (usually
0.55V) at 25mV/sec until 0V is reached. Then the bias voltage is driven up to 1.0 V at
25mV/sec and finally, it is driven down again until it has returned to the value it had just
172
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
before the test was initiated. During this voltage sweep, the probe current is monitored and
the graph of current as a function of voltage is displayed.
If during the test the probe current rises above a factory-set upper limit, the bias voltage is
returned to its pre-test value at 25mV/sec and the test is terminated without completing the
full 1.0 Volt sweep. (The bias voltage test may also be terminated at any time by pressing
the “EXIT” button.)
Display Graph
Under normal conditions, the completed display shows a graph of current as a function of
voltage with the following features: from approximately 0 to 0.2 volts a fairly rapid
increase in current is observed; from approximately 0.2 to 0.8 volts, the current exhibits a
“flat” region where it is nearly independent of voltage and at some voltage above about 0.8
volts, the current rises quickly.
A typical current-voltage curve is shown below. The Sweep Bias millivoltage (along the
bottom of the graph) is a voltage from 0 -1V that is applied to perform the test. The
Operating Bias millivoltage is the current position of the cursor on the graph and
represents the current bias voltage. The horizontal axis numerals are in hundreds of
millivolts.
0.55V 80μA
240
160
80
μA 0
0
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
1V
Figure 8-5 Display of Probe Bias Test Done in Air
Note that the curve is quite flat at 0.55V. This means that even rather large changes in the
probe current-voltage characteristic do not affect the current (and, thus, probe sensitivity)
at 0.55V. In general, the curve formed by decreasing voltage is not identical to that formed
by increasing voltage. This hysteresis is a function of the voltage scan rate and may be
ignored.
The interpretation of figure shown above is as follows:
As the bias voltage of the oxygen-consuming electrode (relative to an internal reference
electrode) is increased, there is an initial increase in current as more and more of the
oxygen that approaches the electrode is reacted. However, at about 0.2V, the current stops
rising and a flat region, independent of voltage, is observed. It is in this region that probe
current is determined by oxygen mass transport limitation. Increasing the voltage cannot
increase the current because oxygen movement is diffusion limited. Finally, at a voltage
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
exceeding 0.8 volts, a second process (water reduction) begins to occur and the current
again rises. To achieve stable results, the probe should be operated within the flat region
so that small changes in the probe characteristics result in negligible changes in probe
current.
In some industrial wastewater applications, particularly those in petroleum refineries,
active gases dissolved in the wastewater can cause this current-voltage characteristic to
shift, moving the flat region to other, usually lower, voltages. Also, in some very rare
instances, the chemical treatment of boiler water can cause this current-voltage
characteristic to shift, moving the flat region to other, usually lower, voltages.
To summarize, the Probe Bias Test automatically varies the probe voltage while
displaying the probe current as shown in the figure. At the completion of the test an
opportunity to change the bias voltage is provided. Thus, even where significant gaseous
contamination might otherwise interfere with the response of the probe to dissolved
oxygen, this advanced feature allows the probe to operate.
(If the results of the probe bias test should ever be significantly different from those shown
in the figure, Honeywell Service should be consulted.)
Procedure
Table 8-14 Running a Probe Bias Scan
Step
1
Action
Screen
CALIBRATION
Calibrate
Press
Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History
PV INPUT CAL
2
Enter
Press
In 1 DO Cal
Use
to select
Input 1 or 2 DO Cal
IN1 DO CAL
3
Enter
Air Cal
Press
Sample Cal
Reset Cal Factor
Pressure Cal
Pressure Offset
Reset Prs Offset
Bias Scan
Bias Volts
Reset Bias Volts
174
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
Step
4
Action
Screen
Use
to select
Bias Scan
You will see:
Enter
Press
to initiate the
IN1 BIAS SCAN
Bias Scan screen
Enter to scan
240
0.55V 144μA
160
80
μA 0
0
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1V
At any time press “Exit” to
abort scan.
µA may be 0, 40, 80, 120
5
Scan in Progress (Example)
Enter
Press
to start scan
The bias voltage is adjusted down
from its original value (usually 0.55V)
at 25mV/sec until 0V is reached.
IN1 BIAS SCAN
Scanning
240
0.05V 13μA
160
80
μA 0
0
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1V
Then the bias voltage is driven up to
1.0 V at 25 mV/sec until “Scan
complete” appears.
IN1 BIAS SCAN
Scan complete 0.90V 236μA
240
160
80
μA 0
0
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
1V
and finally, it is driven down again
until it has returned to the value it had
just before the test was initiated.
During this voltage sweep, the probe
current is monitored and the graph of
current as a function of voltage is
displayed.
IN1 DO BIAS SCAN
Ent=save,
240
=Chng 0.55V 144μA
160
80
μA 0
0
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
1V
At the completion of the test an
opportunity to change the bias voltage
is provided.
Press
to change the bias
voltage, or
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
Step
6
Action
Enter
Screen
Screen returns to “IN1 DO CAL”
screen. Bias Volts will be indicated on
the screen.
Press
to save
176
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Input Calibration
Resetting Pressure Offset or Bias Volts
If the calibration is suspect, you can reset any of these values and calibrate again.
In the same screen as “IN 1 DO Cal”, use the
“Reset Bias Volts”.
keys to highlight “Reset Prs Offset” or
IN1 DO CAL
Air Cal
Sample Cal
Reset Cal Factor
Pressure Cal
Pressure Offset
Reset Prs Offset
Bias Scan
Bias Volts
Reset Bias Volts
Figure 8-6 Resetting Pressure Offset or Bias Volts
Press ENTER. The selected value will be reset to (default).
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outputs Calibration
9 Outputs Calibration
9.1 Overview
Introduction
The section describes the calibration procedures for the following:
Output Cal – calibrate Analog Output 1, Analog Output 2, and Analog Output 3
For other Calibration Procedures refer to the sections listed below.
PV Input Cal – calibrate Input 1 and Input 2 for pH/ORP, Conductivity or
Dissolved Oxygen (See Section 8)
Temperature Cal – calibrate Temperature 1 and Temperature 2 for pH/ORP or
Conductivity (See Section 1)
For Calibration History, refer to Section 11.
What’s in this section?
The topics in this section are listed below.
Topic
See Page
178
9.1 Overview
9.2 Output Calibration
179
178
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outputs Calibration
9.2 Output Calibration
Introduction
The UDA2182 is available with two standard and one optional analog outputs. The
output signals can be adjusted to trim the high and low output current or voltage values
over a range of ± 0.4 % of span to compensate for component tolerance variations.
Accessing the Main Calibration Menu and sub-menus
Press Calibrate . The Main Calibration Menu will appear.
CALIBRATION
Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History
Use the
keys to highlight the “Output Cal” selection.
Enter
Press
to display the sub-menu for that selection.
Required equipment
Output calibration involves connecting a meter to the Analyzer’s output terminals.
The meter required for output calibration depends on the type of outputs.
• Current outputs: current meter capable of resolving 0.01 mA over the range 0 to 20
mA dc
• Voltage outputs: a 250 ohm ± 0.05 % shunt and a volt meter (capable of measuring 1
to 5 Vdc within 1 mV)
A screwdriver to fit the terminal block screws and the screw securing the terminal board
retainer is also required.
Procedure
To calibrate outputs, follow the procedure described in Table 9-1 Procedure for
Calibrating Analyzer Outputs. The output terminals are inside the case as shown in
Figures 6-1 through 6-6.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outputs Calibration
WARNING
While the unit is powered, a potentially lethal shock hazard exists inside the case. Do not open
the case while the unit is powered. Do not access the output terminal as described below while
the unit is powered.
WARNING
A disconnect switch must be installed to break all current carrying conductors. Turn off power
before working on conductors. Failure to observe this precaution may result in serious personal
injury.
180
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outputs Calibration
Procedure
Table 9-1 Procedure for Calibrating Analyzer Outputs
Step
1
Action
Screen
Turn off the power to the Analyzer. More than one switch may
be required to disconnect power.
With the power off, open the case:
2
Loosen the four captive screws on the front of the bezel.
Grasp the bezel on the right side. Lift the bezel gently and swing
the bezel open to the left.
Refer to Figure 7-1 for the location of the terminal board retainer.
Loose the screws that hold the retainer and slide the retainer right
or left until the retainer tabs disengage from the terminal boards.
3
4
Insert a screwdriver into the tab in the terminal board to be wired
and pull. Slide the board half way out. - Refer to Figure 7-1 for the
location.
(Output 1 and 2 – Power Supply/Analog Output/Relay Output
card)
(Output 3 – Option card)
There is a notch in the terminal board into which you can slide the
retainer tabs and hold the boards in place while wiring.
Label and remove the field wiring from the output terminals.
Output 1 – Terminals 12– and 13+
Output 2 – Terminals 10– and 11+
5
6
Output 3 – Terminals 14– and 15+
Feeding the test wiring through the conduit hole in the case and
connect the appropriate type meter to the specific output terminals
Be sure to observe the correct polarity.
Slide the Input board back and close the case and power up the
unit. Do not apply power until the case is closed.
7
CALIBRATION
Input PV Cal
Calibrate
Press
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History
Use
to select
”Output Cal”
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outputs Calibration
Step
8
Action
Enter
Screen
OUTPUT CAL
Press
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Use
to select
an Analog Output to be
calibrated
OUTPUT 1
9
Enter
Press
20mA Offset
4mA Offset
0
0
Reset 20mA Offs
Reset 4mA Offs
Use
to select
” 20 mA Offset”
OUTPUT 1
10
Enter
20mA Offset
4mA Offset
-147
3
Press
Reset 20mA Offs
Reset 4mA Offs
The right most digit will be
“blinking”.
To correct the value on the
meter:
11
• Use the
keys to
increment or decrement the
value of the digit
• Use the
keys to move
the cursor to the next digit.
• Repeat as required to
achieve a 20mA reading on
the test meter
• When all digits have been
changed, press “Enter” to
store the 20mA value.
Press “Exit” to cancel. The
previous value is retained.
182
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outputs Calibration
Step
12
Action
Screen
OUTPUT 1
Use
to select
” 4 mA Offset” and repeat the
process.
20mA Offset
4mA Offset
-147
3
Reset 20mA Offs
Reset 4mA Offs
Press “Enter” to store the 4mA
Offset value.
13
14
Press “Exit” to cancel. The
previous value is retained.
If the calibration is suspect,
you can reset the 20mA and
4mA Offset and calibrate
again.
To calibrate additional Outputs, repeat the above steps Including
powering down the unit before changing the connections to the
output terminals.
When output calibration has been completed, re-install the field
wiring removed in step 5. Disconnect power before opening
the case.
Close the case and power up the unit. Do not apply power until
the case is closed.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outputs Calibration
Viewing and resetting 20mA and 4mA Offset
If the calibration is suspect, you can reset the 20mAand 4mA Offset and calibrate again.
In the same screen as “20mA and 4mA Offset”, use the
20mA Offset” or “Reset 4mA Offset”.
keys to highlight “Reset
OUTPUT 1
20mA Offset
4mA Offset
-147
3
Reset 20mA Offs
Reset 4mA Offs
Figure 9-1 Resetting Output 1 Offsets (example)
Press ENTER. The 20mA Offset or 4mA Offset will be reset to 0(default).
184
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature Input Calibration
10 Temperature Input Calibration
10.1Overview
Introduction
The section describes the calibration procedures for the following:
Temp Input Cal – calibrate (T1) Temperature 1 or (T2) Temperature 2 for
pH/ORP or Conductivity
For other Calibration Procedures refer to the sections listed below.
PV Input Cal – calibrate Input 1 and Input 2 for pH/ORP, Conductivity or
Dissolved Oxygen (See Section 8)
Output Cal – calibrate Analog Output 1, Analog Output 2, and Analog Output 3
(See Section 1)
For Calibration History, refer to Section 11.
What’s in this section?
The topics in this section are listed below.
Topic
See Page
185
10.1 Overview
10.2 Temperature Input Calibration
186
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature Input Calibration
10.2 Temperature Input Calibration
Introduction
Temperature Input Calibration lets you monitor a live temperature reading while
continuing to monitor the sample. The currently displayed temperature value can be
edited through a series of prompts on the screen. The temperature offset value is always
displayed in the temperature units selected in the Maintenance setup menu.
Accessing the Main Calibration Menu and sub-menus
Press Calibrate . The Main Calibration Menu will appear.
CALIBRATION
Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History
Use the
keys to highlight the “Input Temp Cal” selection.
Enter
Press
to display the sub-menu for that selection.
Procedure
Table 10-1 Procedure for Calibrating the Temperature Inputs
Step
1
Action
Screen
CALIBRATION
Calibrate
Press
Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History
Use
to select
” Input Temp Cal”
2
TEMP INPUT CAL
Enter
Press
T1 pH/ORP Cal
T2 Conduc Cal
186
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature Input Calibration
Step
Action
Screen
Use the
keys to highlight
the desired “Temperature Input”
selection.
3
T1 pH/ORP CAL
Temp Cal
Enter
Press
Press
(Read only)
Temp Offset
Reset Tmp Offs
4
5
Enter
Follow the prompts at the top
and bottom of the screen.
“Place probe in sample”
The display will show the
temperature of the reference
solution as measured by the
probe and Analyzer system.
“Press Enter when stable”
6
Once the reading is stable,
“Change to sample value”
Use
to change the value to
Enter
Press
match the actual temperature of
the reference solution at its
current temperature.
“Enter to save, Exit to cancel”
Limit is ± 5ºC (± 9ºF)
7
8
This will save the Temperature
Offset value. If the calibration is
not successful, an error
Enter
Press
message will be displayed.
If the calibration is suspect,
you can reset the
Temperature Offset and
calibrate again.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature Input Calibration
Viewing and resetting Temperature Offset
If the calibration is suspect, you can reset the Temperature Offset and calibrate again.
In the same screen as “Temp Cal”, use the
keys to highlight “Reset Tmp Offset”.
T1 pH/ORP CAL
Temp Cal
(Read only)
Temp Offset
Reset Tmp Offset
Figure 10-1 Resetting temperature offset
Press ENTER. The Temperature Offset will be reset to (default).
188
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calibration History
11 Calibration History
11.1 Overview
Calibration History records every successful input or output calibration with timestamp,
with detail available on cal type and before and after cal values by scrolling and selecting
cal event name. Calibration records are listed top down from most recent to least recent.
Each line in the list consists of a calibration event name and the date and time of
occurrence.
Successful automatic cals from auto cycling also recorded and identified. Status warns of
cal history at 50% and 90% and when erasing old records.
Accessing the Main Calibration Menu and sub-menus
Press Calibrate . The Main Calibration Menu will appear.
CALIBRATION
Input PV Cal
Input Temp Cal
Output Cal
Cal History
Use the
keys to highlight the “Cal History” selection. Press “Enter”.
Calibration Records
Table 11-1 Cal History items
Item
Values
Item
Values
Sample Conduc
Sample pH/ORP
Buffer pH 1
Calibration event
name
In 1 PV Cal
Calibration type
In 2 PV Cal
In 1 Temp Cal
In 2 Temp Cal
Out 1 4mA Cal
Out 1 20mA Cal
Out 2 4mA Cal
Out 2 20mA Cal
Out 3 4mA Cal
Out 3 20mA Cal
Buffer pH 2
Auto Buffer pH 1
Auto Buffer pH 2
Auto Cycle pH 1
Auto Cycle pH 2
Sample DO
Auto Air DO
Auto Cycle DO
The list is fully scrollable and individual records are selectable for further detail by
highlighting specific event names and pressing Enter. The calibration history has a
capacity of 128 records.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calibration History
11.2 Clear Calibration History
Setup
• Press
to display the Main menu.
Enter
• Use the
keys to select “Maintenance” then press
to enter the sub-
menu.
Enter
• Use the
• Use the
keys to select “Display” then press
to enter the sub-menu.
Enter
keys to select “Clr Cal Hist” then press
to allow change.
Enter
• Use the
keys to select “Yes” then press
to clear the Calibration History
screen.
190
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics and Messages
12 Diagnostics and Messages
12.1Overview
Introduction
This section contains information on status and alarm messages, as well as on diagnostics
and system error messages and Fail messages. All these messages are displayed on the
“Status Message” stripe. If more than one message is active, the display will cycle
through all the messages, and then repeat the cycle.
What’s in this section?
The topics in this section are listed below.
Topic
See Page
191
12.1 Overview
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
System Status Messages
Calibration Diagnostics
Auto Cycle Fail Messages
Pharma Fail Messages
192
193
194
195
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics and Messages
12.2 System Status Messages
Overview
The following table lists all the error messages that can appear for Measurement errors,
Input errors, Output errors, and Alarm Conditions.
Table 12-1 Status Messages
Status Message
HOLD ACTIVE
Definition
Analog Inputs (PVs) are held at their last active levels by
pressing the “HOLD” button, until cancelled by pressing the
“HOLD” button again.
n = 1 or 2
Measurement Errors
TEMP n UNDERRANGE
Measured temperature is less than the minimum range value
according to measurement type, where: n is 1 (Input 1) or 2
(Input 2).
TEMP n OVERRANGE
Measured temperature is greater than the maximum range
value according to measurement type, where: n is 1 (Input 1)
or 2 (Input 2).
PV n UNDERRANGE
PV n OVERRANGE
Measured PV is less than the minimum range value according
to measurement type, where n is 1 (Input 1) or 2 (Input 2).
Measured PV is greater than the maximum range value
according to measurement type, where n is 1 (Input 1) or 2
(Input 2).
n = 1 or 2
Input Errors – Output(s), for which Input is source, will go to failsafe level
PROBE TEMP n INPUT
FAULT
Probe temperature sensor at Input n is defective.
PROBE PV n INPUT FAULT
Probe PV sensor at Input n is defective.
PROBE n INPUT OUT OF
SOLUTION
Probe at Input n is out of solution.
TEMP n INPUT OPEN
Probe temperature sensor at Input n is not connected. Check
Wiring.
PV n INPUT OPEN
Probe PV sensor at Input n is not connected. Check Wiring.
INPUT BOARD n FAULT
An input board disconnect while powered results in an input
fault condition and this status message. The PV value is the
failsafe parameter value and the temperature is at the lower
limit of the input board’s temperature range.
Re-insert the input board, or cycle the unit’s power if the input
board is no longer needed.
n = 1, 2, or 3
Output Errors – Output in error goes to failsafe level
OUTPUT n OPEN
Analog output n current is less than 3 mA and is less than
output minimum mA value. Check wiring.
n = 1, 2, 3, or 4
Alarm Conditions
ALARM n ACTIVE
Alarm number n is currently active.
192
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics and Messages
12.3 Calibration Diagnostics
pH/ORP/DO
All of the possible errors are detected during a probe calibration and will abort the
calibration process with the message “FAIL” appearing briefly, followed by a return to
the online pH/ORP/DO display. At that point, the specific error will be displayed as
described. In addition, any of following errors may occur during probe calibration and
abort the calibration process.
Table 12-2 Probe Calibration Diagnostics
Status Message
Definition
The span between pH buffer 1 and pH buffer 2 is less than 2 pH. Use a set of
buffers that are at least 2 pH apart. As a warning status, will clear when an
appropriate buffer 2 value is selected. As an error message, will abort
calibration and preserve original slope value.
BUFFER SPAN TOO LOW
Resulting pH offset (standardization) value is less than –2 pH after pH slope
calibration. Calibration is aborted and original pH offset and slope values are
preserved.
OFFSET UNDERRANGE
OFFSET OVERRANGE
Resulting pH offset (standardization) value is greater than 2 pH after pH slope
calibration. Calibration is aborted and original pH offset and slope values are
preserved.
Resulting pH slope is less than 80%. Calibration is aborted and original slope
value is preserved.
SLOPE UNDERRANGE
Resulting pH slope is greater than 105%. Calibration is aborted and original
slope value is preserved.
SLOPE OVERRANGE
CAL FACTOR UNDERRANGE
CAL FACTOR OVERRANGE
PROBE CURRENT TOO LOW
PROBE CURRENT TOO HIGH
Resulting DO calibration factor is less than 0.001268. DO calibration is
aborted and original calibration factor is preserved.
Resulting DO calibration factor is greater than 0.040580. DO calibration is
aborted and original calibration factor is preserved.
DO probe current is less than 5 µA. DO bias scan is aborted and original bias
voltage is preserved.
DO probe current exceeds the greater of 133% of the probe current at last
successful calibration or 160 µA. During DO bias scan, scan is aborted and
original bias voltage is preserved.
READINGS UNSTABLE
SOLUTION UNSTABLE
DO air PV or temperature readings too unstable for successful air calibration.
Calibration is aborted and original calibration factor is preserved.
pH solution PV or temperature readings too unstable for successful auto
buffer calibration. Calibration is aborted and original pH offset (for buffer 1) or
slope value (for buffer 2) is preserved.
pH solution temperature readings less than minimum of 0 degrees C. Auto
buffer calibration is aborted and original pH offset (for buffer 1) or slope value
(for buffer 2) is preserved
SOLUTION TEMP TOO LOW
SOLUTION TEMP TOO HIGH
pH solution temperature readings greater than maximum of 100 degrees C.
Auto buffer calibration is aborted and original pH offset (for buffer 1) or slope
value (for buffer 2) is preserved
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics and Messages
12.4 Auto Cycle Fail Messages
Overview
Auto Cycle Fail is active whenever an auto cycle failure has occurred. The status
message “Auto Cycle n Fail” is also displayed during a fail state. Once detected, the
current cycle proceeds immediately to the Probe Insert step (if enabled) or to the Resume
Delay step. The fail state remains for the duration of the Resume Delay, whereupon the
fail state returns to 0 and the fail message is cancelled. A fail state also provides a detail
message in the lower half of the Auto Cycle display regarding the specific reason for the
error. These messages are listed below:
Table 12-3 Auto Cycle Fail Messages
Fail Message
Reason
Probe Extract Timeout
Probe Transit enabled, Extract Wait Src not None and state not 0
within Max Transit Mins of start of Probe Extract.
Probe Insert Timeout
Input Fault
Probe Transit enabled, Insert Wait Src not None and state not 0
within Max Transit Mins of start of Probe Insert.
Input board, PV or temperature fault has occurred during calibration
(fault type in status message).
Solution Unstable
Buffer Span Too Low
PH PV or temperature not stable for calibration within elapsed time
limit Max Cal Mins.
Difference of PV reading for pH Cal 2 (Slope) and that of last pH Cal
1 (zero offset) < 1.8 pH.
Offset Underrange
Offset Overrange
Slope Underrange
Slope Overrange
Readings Unstable
PH calibration has calculated and rejected a zero offset < -2 pH.
PH calibration has calculated and rejected a zero offset > 2 pH.
PH calibration has calculated and rejected a slope < 80 %.
PH calibration has calculated and rejected a slope > 105 %.
DO PV or temperature not stable for calibration within elapsed time
limit Max Cal Mins.
Probe Current Too Low
Probe current is < 5 μA during DO calibration.
194
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagnostics and Messages
12.5Pharma Fail Messages
Overview
Pharma Fail is active whenever a Pharma failure has occurred. Status messages are also
displayed during a fail state. These messages are listed below:
Table 12-4 Pharma Fail Messages
Warn Condition
Diagnostic Message
Stage 1: Measured conductivity PHARMA n PV LIMIT WARN
exceeds Pct Warning value.
Diagnostic Message
Fail Condition
Stage 1: Measured conductivity PHARMA n PV OVERLIMIT
exceeds 100%
Stage 1: Temperature not
PHARMA n TEMP OVERRANGE
within range of 0 – 100 degrees PHARMA n TEMP UNDERRANGE
C.
Stage 2: Conductivity (due to
uptake of atmospheric carbon
dioxide) is 0.1 µS/cm or greater
per 5 minutes
PHARMA n PV OVERLIMIT
Stage 3: pH not within range of
5 – 7 pH.
PHARMA n PH OVERRANGE
PHARMA n PH UNDERRANGE
PHARMA n TEMP OVERRANGE
PHARMA n TEMP UNDERRANGE
Stages 2 and 3: Temperature
not within range of 24 – 26
degrees C.
Diagnostic Message
Status Condition
Stages 2 and 3: Pharma
PHARMA n TIMER ACTIVE
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ethernet and Communications
13 Ethernet and Communications
13.1Overview
For all information relating to the UDA2182 and Communications please refer to
the UDA2182 Communications User Guide #70-82-25-126.
196
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Replacement Parts List
14 Accessories and Replacement Parts List
14.1Overview
This section provides part numbers for field-replaceable parts and for accessories.
What’s in this section?
The topics in this section are listed below.
Topic
See Page
197
14.1 Overview
14.2 Part Numbers
198
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Replacement Parts
14.2 Part Numbers
Introduction
Part numbers for field-replaceable parts and accessories are provided in Table 14-1.
Table 14-1 Part Numbers
Kit/Part Number
51453313-501
50009551-501
51453316-501
51453319-501
51453319-502
51453518-502
51453540-501
51453328-501
50010239-501
50010610-501
50001619-001
50025563-501
Description
pH Input Card
Quantity
1
pH for Preamp Input Card
Conductivity Input Card
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ppm Dissolved Oxygen Input Card
ppb Dissolved Oxygen Input Card
Bezel Assembly
Power Supply Card
Additional Analog & (2) Relay card
Rear Case and CPU Card
PID Control Field Update
Process Instrument Explorer Software
Communications Card
198
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
15 Appendices
15.1 Table of Contents
Topic
See Page
PH/ORP
200
202
204
208
15.2 Appendix A – Entering Values for Lead Resistance Compensation
15.3 Appendix B – Entering Values for Lead Resistance Compensation [Titanium Cells]
15.4 Appendix C - Cyanide Waste Treatment
15.5 Appendix D – Chrome Waste Treatment
Conductivity/Resistivity
212
216
15.6 Appendix E – Two-cell Applications
15.7 Appendix F – Using a Precision Check Resistor
(For Conductivity)
Dissolved Oxygen
218
219
222
223
225
226
227
15.8 Appendix G – Noise Testing, Dissolved Oxygen Application
15.9 Appendix H – DO Probe and Analyzer Tests
15.10 Appendix I – Parameters Affecting Dissolved Oxygen Measurement
15.11 Appendix J – Discussion on Chemical Interferences on Measured DO Currents
15.12 Appendix K – Percent Saturation Readout
15.13 Appendix L – Leak Detection in PPB Applications
15.14 Appendix M – Procedure for Low Level ppb Dissolved Oxygen Testing
15.15 Appendix N – Sample Tap Electrode Mounting Recommendations
15.16 Appendix O – Auto Clean and Auto Cal Examples
229
231
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
15.2Appendix A – Entering Values for Lead Resistance Compensation
(See Appendix B for titanium cells mounted into stainless steel flow chamber 31079198)
Introduction
If you use standard Honeywell cell lead lengths of 7 or 20 feet connected directly to the
Analyzer, no compensation for lead resistance is necessary. Similarly, if a junction box
is used to extend the leads up to 150 feet, no compensation is required. However, if
longer leads are used (greater than 150 feet), signal accuracy can be adversely affected
unless you enter information that will permit the UDA2182 to compensate for lead
resistance in the black and white cell leads only. Lead resistance compensation is not
necessary, nor applied to the other cell leads.
For lengths up to 1000 feet*, simply specify the gauge and length as described in Table
6-5. Note that the maximum wire size for sensor inputs at the input terminal board is
16AWG.
* DirectLine DL4000 series cells have a total lead length limit of 250 feet.
If mixed wired gauges are used, or lead length or wire gauge are not within the stated
ranges, the UDA2182 can still perform the compensation. However, you must first
calculate the lead resistance, and then put it in terms of the available settings for AWG
gauge and length.
The resistance of each available gauge choice (in copper wire) is:
16 AWG = 4.0 ohms per 1000 feet
18 AWG = 6.4 ohms per 1000 feet
20 AWG = 10.2 ohms per 1000 feet
22 AWG = 16.1 ohms per 1000 feet
For example, suppose extension cables between the cell and Analyzer consist of 500 feet
of 18-gauge wire and 200 feet of 16-gauge WIRE. The cell has the TC head option.
500 ft of 18 AWG wire
200 ft. of 16 AWG wire
Analyzer
Honeywell
Conductivity Cell
Junction
Box
Figure 15-1 Example of a Conductivity Loop
Because there are two different types of wire used in each lead to the cell in this example,
the total lead resistance is calculated as follows: (Note: the analyzer accounts for the fact
that there is always a pair of conductor wires in the system loop.)
(0.5 x 6.4) + (0.2 x 4.0) = 4.0 ohms
200
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Since the analyzer only allows entry of one wire gauge type, we allow for the worst-case
condition by dividing the total resistance by the resistance per thousand feet of the higher
resistance gauge wire. In our example this would be:
4.0 ohms ÷ 6.4 ohms per thousand feet of 18 AWG wire = 625 feet
Therefore, in our example we would use the procedure in Table 6-5, and specify the wire
gauge as 18 AWG and the length as 625 feet.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
15.3Appendix B – Entering Values for Lead Resistance Compensation
[Titanium Cells]
(4973 or DL4311 Titanium cells mounted in stainless steel flow chamber 31079198)
Introduction
If you use standard Honeywell cell lead lengths of 7 or 20 feet connected directly to the
Analyzer, no compensation for lead resistance is necessary. Similarly, if a junction box
is used to extend the leads up to 150 feet, no compensation is required. However, if
longer leads are used (greater than 150 feet), signal accuracy can be adversely affected
unless you enter information that will permit the UDA2182 to compensate for lead
resistance in the black and white cell leads only. Lead resistance compensation is not
necessary, nor applied to the other cell leads.
For lengths up to 1000 feet*, simply specify the gauge and length as described in Table
6-5. Note that the maximum wire size for sensor inputs at the input terminal board is
16AWG. Coax cable is recommended for extension of the black and white cell leads.
* DirectLine DL4000 series cells have a total lead length limit of 250 feet.
If mixed wired gauges are used, or lead length or wire gauge are not within the stated
ranges, the UDA2182 can still perform the compensation. However, you must first
calculate the lead resistance, and then put it in terms of the available settings for AWG
gauge and length. Because the smaller gauge coax cables consist of a low resistance
shield and a higher resistance conductor, an average equivalent resistance is used for
calculations, i.e. 20 AWG wire is used to simulate 22AWG coax.
The resistance of each available gauge choice (in copper wire) is:
16 AWG = 4.0 ohms per 1000 feet
18 AWG = 6.4 ohms per 1000 feet
20 AWG = 10.2 ohms per 1000 feet
(Use 18 AWG values for Input Configuration and calculations)
22 AWG = 16.1 ohms per 1000 feet
(Use 20 AWG values for Input Configuration and calculations)
For example, suppose extension cables between the cell and Analyzer consist of 200 feet
of 22-gauge coax and 500 feet of 18-gauge coax. The cell has the TC head option.
500 ft of 18 AWG coax
200 ft. of 22 AWG coax
Analyzer
Honeywell
Conductivity Cell
Junction
Box
Figure 15-2 Example of a Conductivity Loop
202
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Because there are two different types of wire used in each lead to the cell in this example,
the total lead resistance is calculated as follows: (Note: the analyzer accounts for the fact
that there is always a pair of conductor wires in the system loop.)
(0.5 x 6.4) + (0.2 x 10.2) = 5.24 ohms
Since the analyzer only allows entry of one wire gauge type, we allow for the worst-case
condition by dividing the total resistance by the resistance per thousand feet of the higher
resistance gauge wire. In our example this would be:
5.24 ohms ÷ 10.2 ohms per thousand feet of 22 AWG wire = 514 feet
Therefore, in our example we would use the procedure in Table 6-5, and specify the wire
gauge as 20 AWG and the length as 514 feet. (20 AWG wire simulates 22 AWG coax)
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
15.4 Appendix C - Cyanide Waste Treatment
Introduction
Uses of cyanide solutions
Cyanide solutions are used in plating baths for zinc, cadmium, copper, brass, silver and
gold. The toxic rinse waters and dumps from these operations require destruction of the
cyanide (typically to a level below 0.1 ppm) before its discharge.
Technique for cyanide destruction
The technique most often used for cyanide destruction is a one or two-stage chemical
treatment process. The first stage raises the pH and oxidizes the cyanide to less toxic
cyanate. When required, the second stage neutralizes and further oxidizes the cyanide to
harmless carbonate and nitrogen. The neutralization also allows the metals to be
precipitated and separated from the effluent.
Consistent treatment and stable control in this type of process requires well-mixed
reaction tanks with enough volume for adequate retention time. See Figure 15-3.
Retention time is calculated by dividing the filled or usable tank volume by the waste
flowrate. Typically it is 10 minutes or more.
RECORDER
PROPORTIONAL
CAUSTIC
NOTE: The separate pH and ORP
measurements and control shown
in the first stage may be handled
with a single UDA2182 Analyzer
with combined input.
ACID
ON/OFF
HYPOCHLORITE
ORP
pH ANALYZER
CONTROLLER
pH
HYPOCHLORITE
ORP
CYANIDE
WASTE
CYANIDE TO CYANATE
CYANATE TO CARBONATE
AND NEUTRALIZATION
SETTLING
SLUDGE
Figure 15-3 Cyanide Treatment System
204
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
First Stage of Cyanide Destruction
Raise pH and oxidize cyanide
Sodium hydroxide (caustic) is used to raise the effluent to about 11 pH, which will
promote the oxidation reaction and ensure complete treatment. The oxidizing agent is
usually sodium hypochlorite, NaOCl. The reaction for the first stage is given below using
the NaOCl and with cyanide expressed in ionic form (CN- ). The result is sodium cyanate
(NaCNO) and chloride ion (Cl- ).
NaOCl + CN− → NaCNO + Cl−
This first-stage reaction is analyzed and controlled by independent control loops: caustic
addition by pH control and oxidizing-agent addition by ORP control (redox potential or
ORP, oxidation-reduction potential). Often an ON-OFF type of control using solenoid
valves or metering pumps can be used. The pH controller simply calls for more caustic
whenever pH falls below 11. The ORP controller calls for additional hypochlorite
whenever ORP potential falls below about +450 mV. (The metal ORP electrode is
positive with respect to the reference electrode.)
Titration curve
The ORP titration curve in Figure 15-4 shows the entire millivolt range if cyanide is
treated as a batch. For continuous treatment, operation is maintained in the oxidized,
positive region of the curve near the +450 mV setpoint. The ORP setpoint can vary
between installations, depending upon pH, the oxidizing agent, the presence of various
metals in solution, and the type of reference electrode used. Determine the exact setpoint
empirically at that potential where all the cyanide has been oxidized without excess
hypochlorite feed. This point can be verified with a sensitive colorimetric test kit or
similar check for cyanide.
pH= 10.5
+600
pH= 11.0
+400
+200
0
-200
-400
0
2
1
3
6
4
7
5
VOLUME OF HYPOCHLORITE ADDED
Figure 15-4 First Stage Cyanide Oxidation - Typical Titration Curve
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Importance of pH control
As shown in Figure 15-4, pH has a direct effect on the ORP potential and must be closely
controlled to achieve consistent ORP control, especially if hypochlorite is used as the
oxidizing agent. Hypochlorite raises pH, which lowers the ORP potential, which in turn
calls for additional hypochlorite -- a runaway situation. To avoid this situation, use close
pH control and locate the ORP electrode at a distance from the hypochlorite addition
point.
Reliable measurement with gold electrode
For this application, a gold ORP electrode gives a more reliable measurement than does a
platinum electrode, because platinum may catalyze additional reactions at its surface and
is more subject to coating than gold. Note that the solubility of gold in cyanide solutions
does not present a problem as it is in contact, primarily, with cyanide. In fact, a slight loss
of gold serves to keep the electrode clean.
Second Stage of Cyanide Destruction
Neutralize and further oxidize cyanate
The wastewater is neutralized in order to promote additional oxidation and to meet the
discharge pH limits. Typically, sulfuric acid is added to lower the pH to about 8.5. At this
pH the second oxidation occurs more rapidly.
WARNING
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious
injury.
An interlock must be provided to prevent the addition of acid before the
positive oxidation of ALL cyanide. Failure to observe this precaution can
result in the generation of highly toxic hydrogen cyanide.
Additional chlorine or sodium hypochlorite (NaOCl) can be added in proportion to that
added in the first stage, or by separate ORP control to complete the oxidation to sodium
bicarbonate (NaHCO3) in the following reaction:
2NaCNO + 3NaOCl + H2O → 2NaHCO3 + N2 + 3NaCl
ORP control in the second stage is very similar to that in the first stage, except that the
control point is near +600 mV. Control of pH in the second stage is more difficult than in
the first stage, because the control point is closer to the sensitive neutral area.
Proportional type pH control is often used.
Removal of suspended metal hydroxides
Following the second stage, a settling tank and/or a filter can be used to remove
suspended metal hydroxides. However, further treatment may be required to lower
concentrations of some metals below their hydroxide solubilities.
206
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Batch Treatment
Sequence of steps
Continuous treatment is shown in Figure 15-3. However, all of the reactions can be
achieved with semi-automatic batch control. Only a single tank with a pH controller and
an ORP controller are required. The steps are sequenced, and the pH and ORP setpoints
are changed to give the same results as for the continuous treatment. Caustic is added to
raise pH to 11; then hypochlorite is added to raise the ORP potential to about +450 mV
while more caustic is added as required to maintain 11 pH.
WARNING
Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious
injury.
An interlock must be provided to prevent the addition of acid before the
positive oxidation of ALL cyanide. Failure to observe this precaution can
result in the generation of highly toxic hydrogen cyanide.
Then the acid can be added to neutralize the batch and further oxidation will complete the
cyanate-to-carbonate conversion. A settling period can then be used to remove solids, or
the batch can be pumped directly to another settling tank or pond.
ORP Potential a Measure of Status of Reaction
Cyanide is reducing ion
An oxidation-reduction reaction involves the transfer of electrons from the ion being
oxidized to the oxidizing agent. In cyanide destruction, chlorine or hypochlorite accepts
electrons from the cyanide, oxidizing it, while simultaneously the hypochlorite is reduced
to chloride. ORP potential is a measure of the status of the oxidation-reduction reaction;
i.e., the gold electrode detects the solution’s ability to accept or donate electrons. The
hypochlorite, an oxidizing ion, accepts electrons, which makes the electrode more
positive. The cyanide, a reducing ion, provides electrons and makes the electrode more
negative. The net electrode potential is related to the ratio of concentrations of reducing
and oxidizing ions in the solution.
Potential cannot be used as monitor of effluent
This electrode potential is extremely sensitive in measuring the degree of treatment in the
reaction tank. However, it cannot be related to a definite concentration of a cyanide or
cyanate; therefore it cannot be used as a monitor of final effluent concentration.
Importance of clean electrode
Reliable ORP measurement requires a very clean metal electrode surface. Routinely
clean the electrodes with a soft cloth, dilute acids, and/or cleaning agents to promote fast
response.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
15.5Appendix D – Chrome Waste Treatment
Use of Chromates
Corrosion inhibition
Chromates are used as corrosion inhibitors in cooling towers and in metal-finishing
operations including bright dip, conversion coating, and chrome plating.
Necessity for removal of chromium ion from wastewater
The wastewater form rinse tanks, dumps, and cooling tower blowdown contains toxic
soluble chromium ion, Cr+6, which must be removed, typically to a level less than 0.5
ppm before discharge.
Technique for chrome removal
The technique most often used for this chrome removal is a two-stage chemical treatment
process. The first stage lowers the pH and adds the reducing agent to convert the chrome
from soluble Cr+6 to Cr+3. The second stage neutralizes the wastewater, forming insoluble
chromium hydroxide, which can then be removed.
Consistent treatment and stable control in this type of process requires well-mixed
reaction tanks with enough volume for adequate retention time (see Figure 15-5).
Retention time is calculated by dividing the filled or usable tank volume by the waste
flowrate. Typically, it is ten minutes or more.
RECORDER
NOTE: The separate pH and ORP
ACID
measurements and control shown
in the first stage may be handled
with a single UDA2182 Analyzer
CAUSTIC
with combined input
BISULFITE
Ph ANALYZER/
CONTROLLER
pH
ORP
CHROME
WASTE
POLYELECTROLYTE
SETTLING
REDUCTION
NEUTRALIZATION
SLUDGE
Figure 15-5 Chrome Treatment System
208
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
First Stage of Chrome Removal
Lower pH and add reducing agent
Sulfuric acid is used to lower the pH to about 2.5, which promotes the reduction reaction
and ensures complete treatment. The reducing agent may be sulfur dioxide, sodium
sulfite, sodium bisulfite, sodium metabisulfite, sodium hydrosulfite, or ferrous sulfate.
The reaction is given below. The chromate is expressed as chromic acid, CrO3, with a +6
charge on the chromium and the reducing agent is expressed as sulfurous acid, H2SO3,
which is generated by sulfites at low pH. The result is chromium sulfate, Cr2(SO4)3, with
a +3 charge on the chromium. The reaction is expressed as:
2CrO3 + 3H2SO3 → Cr (SO4 )3 + 3H2O
2
This first stage reaction is analyzed and controlled by independent control loops: acid
addition by pH control; reducing-agent addition by redox potential or ORP (oxidation-
reduction potential) control. Often an ON-OFF type of control using solenoid valves or
metering pumps can be used. The pH controller simply calls for additional acid whenever
the pH rises above 2.5. The ORP controller calls for additional reducing agent whenever
the ORP potential rises above about +250 mV. (The metal ORP electrode is positive with
respect to the reference electrode.)
Titration curve
The ORP titration curve in Figure 15-6 shows the entire millivolt range if Cr+6 chrome is
treated as a batch. With continuous treatment, operation is maintained in the fully
reduced portion of the curve near the +250 mV setpoint. The ORP setpoint can vary
between installations, depending on pH, reducing agent, presence of additional
contaminants and dissolved oxygen, and the type of reference electrode used. Determine
the exact setpoint empirically. This ORP setpoint should be at a potential where all of the
Cr+6 has been reduced without excess sulfite consumption, which can release sulfur
dioxide gas. This point can be verified with a sensitive colorimetric test kit or similar
check.
700
600
pH= 2
500
400
pH= 3
300
200
100
0
2
1
3
6
4
7
5
VOLUMEOFBISULFATE ADDED
Figure 15-6 Chrome Reduction - Typical Titration Curve
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Chrome reduction is slow enough that 10 to 15 minutes may be required for a complete
reaction and this time increases if pH is controlled at higher levels. The pH also has a
direct effect on the ORP potential as shown in Figure 15-6. Therefore, pH must be
controlled to achieve consistent ORP control.
Second Stage of Chrome Removal
Neutralize the wastewater
In this stage the wastewater is neutralized to precipitate the Cr+3 as insoluble chromium
hydroxide, Cr(OH)3. Another reason is to meet the discharge pH limits. Sodium
hydroxide or lime is used to raise the pH to 7.5 to 8.5 in the following reaction.
Cr2(SO4 )3 + 6NaOH → 3Na2SO4 + 2Cr(OH)3
pH control point close to neutral point
Control of pH in the second stage is more difficult than in the first because the control
point is in the sensitive area closer to the neutral point. Although this reaction is fast, for
stability, a retention time of at least 10 minutes is usually needed for continuous
treatment. Proportional pH control is often used in this stage.
Remove suspended chromium hydroxide
Subsequently, a settling tank and/or filter will remove the suspended chromium
hydroxide. Flocculating agents are helpful in this separation.
Batch Treatment
Sequence of steps
Continuous treatment for chrome removal is shown in Figure 15-5. However, all of the
reactions can be achieved with semi-automatic batch control. Only a single tank with a
pH controller and an ORP controller are required. The steps of the treatment are
sequenced, and the pH setpoint is changed to give the same results as for the continuous
treatment. Acid is added to lower pH to 2.5; then reducing agent is added to lower ORP
potential to +250 mV. After waiting a few minutes to ensure a complete reaction (and
possible test for Cr+6), the sodium hydroxide is added to raise pH to 8 as in the second
stage of the continuous treatment. The settling period then begins, or the batch is pumped
to a separate settling tank or pond.
ORP Potential a Measure of Status
Sulfite is reducing ion
An oxidation-reduction reaction involves the transfer of the electrons from the reducing
agent to the ion being reduced. In the chrome removal application, sulfur in the sulfite
ion donates electrons to reduce the chromium; simultaneously the chromium oxidizes the
sulfur. The ORP potential is a measure of the status of the oxidation-reduction reaction;
the platinum or gold electrode detects the solution’s ability to accept or donate electrons.
+2
Sulfite (SO3 ), a reducing ion, donates electrons which makes the electrode more
210
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
negative. The chromium, an oxidizing ion, Cr+6, accepts electrons and makes the
electrode more positive. The net electrode potential is related to the ratio of
concentrations of reducing and oxidizing ions in the solution.
Potential cannot be used as monitor of effluent
This electrode potential is extremely sensitive in measuring the degree of chrome
treatment in the reaction tank. However, it cannot be related to a definite concentration of
chrome and, therefore, cannot be used as a final effluent monitor of chrome
concentration.
Importance of clean electrode
Reliable ORP measurements require a very clean metal electrode surface. Clean the
electrodes routinely with a soft cloth; dilute acids, and/or cleaning agents to promote fast
response. Control at low pH levels in the first stage of treatment has also been found to
help maintain clean ORP electrodes.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
15.6 Appendix E – Two-cell Applications
Ion Exchange
Ion exchange operations can achieve especially precise control using the conductivity
ratio of two points with each bed. Ratio measurement accounts for feedwater variations
when the upstream point is measured at the cation bed inlet. With the upstream point in
the bed as shown for following stages, it can identify exhaustion before breakthrough.
INLET
CELL 2
CELL 2
CELL 1
CELL 2
CELL 1
CELL 1
CATION BED
DI WATER
ANION BED
MIXED BED
Reverse Osmosis
Reverse Osmosis efficiency is monitored by comparing inlet and outlet conductivity (or
TDS). Automatic calculations of Percent Rejection or Percent Passage are provided. If
readout is in resistivity, cell locations are interchanged. Temperature readout assists with
normalized performance comparisons.
CELL 2
CELL 1
RO UNIT
FEED
PERMEATE
•
•
CONCENTRATE
Cell1
Cell2
x100
Percent Passage =
Typical Range is 0 to 20%
Typical Range is 80 to 100%
Cell1
Cell2
(1-
) x100
Percent Rejection =
Conductivity/Resistivity/TDS Difference
Conductivity/Resistivity/TDS difference using redundant cells on critical processes can
provide a valuable diagnostic capability. If the difference in measurements exceeds the
alarm points, an operator is summoned for corrective action. Monitoring may be switched
to the alternate cell during maintenance. For deviation in either direction, two different
212
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
alarms (+ and -) are used. A difference kind of diagnostic can be provided by a precision
check resistor in place of one cell to give continuous Analyzer/Controller checking at one
value. Also see 15.11 Appendix J – Discussion on Chemical Interferences on Measured
DO Currents.
UDA2182 ANALYZER
OUTPUT SIGNAL
DIFFERENCE ALARM
CELL 1
CELL 2
PROCESS
Parts Rinsing
Parts rinsing is usually controlled by conductivity to obtain adequate rinsing without
wasting excess water, whether a single stage or a counter-current series of tanks. The
two-cell ratio approach can determine whether inadequate rinsing is due to low flowrate
or due to poor supply water quality.
CELL 2
CELL 1
PARTS FLOW
WASTE WATER
RINSE
WATER
Cell1
Cell2
Typical Ratio Range is 0.1 to 1.1
Conductivity Ratio =
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Softener Monitor
Softener monitoring by conductivity ratio gives a continuous indication of performance.
Sodium is typically more conductive than the hardness minerals it displaces, yielding a
higher conductivity at the outlet. A ratio approaching 1 indicates that hardness ions are
breaking through and that regeneration is needed.
(HARD) WATER SUPPLY
CELL 2
CELL 1
(SOFT) TREATED WATER
Cell1
Cell2
Typical Ratio Range is 1 to 1.25
Softening Ratio =
Steam Power Measurements
The three conductivity measurements in power plants relate to water chemistry
parameters as follows:
• Specific conductivity -- chemical treatment level
• Cation conductivity -- total anion contaminants
• Degassed conductivity -- non-volatile anion contaminants
• Cation minus degassed conductivities -- carbon dioxide
214
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
SPECIFIC
CATION
CONDUCTIVITY
CONDUCTIVITY
UDA2182
ANALYZER
SAMPLE
CELL 1
CELL 2
CATION
EXCHANGER
SPECIFIC
DEGASSED
CONDUCTIVITY
CATION
CONDUCTIVITY
CONDUCTIVITY
(ANIONS)
UDA2182
ANALYZER
UDA2182
ANALYZER
CARBON DIOXIDE
BY CALCULATION
SAMPLE
CELL 2
CELL 1
CATION
EXCHANGER
REBOILER
Sodium Hydroxide and Hydrochloric Acid Concentration Measurements
The measurement range of sodium hydroxide by conductivity is limited by temperature.
The conductivity is limited by temperature. The conductivity of sodium hydroxide
reaches a maximum value near 14% at 0º C and 29% at 100º C. Near the maximum there
is poor resolution and no reliable way to know which side of the peak is being measured.
Therefore, the UDA2182 measurement range is restricted by temperature to assure
reliable values. Maximum concentrations are 10% at 0º C, 13% at 25º C and 20% at 75º
C and above, with linear interpolation between these points. Operation above these limits
gives a flashing display.
The measurement range of hydrochloric acid is restricted to less than 15.5% above 40º C
and less than 18% below 40º C.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
15.7Appendix F – Using a Precision Check Resistor
(For Conductivity)
Introduction
The operation of the Analyzer/Controller can be verified by replacing the input from a
cell with a precision check resistor across the Analyzer/Controller input terminals. In
addition, an 8550 ohm resistor (Honeywell Part No. 31233300) can be wired in place of
the inputs from the temperature compensator to simulate 25º C, the reference
temperature. The unit will display a simulated “process value” appropriate for the check
resistor installed. (Equations showing the relationship between resistor rating and
displayed value are provided below.) If the displayed value is incorrect, the
Analyzer/Controller should be serviced.
This technique can be used two ways:
• Offline - Install the precision check resistor temporarily in place of the input from
either cell to check the operation of the Analyzer/Controller. When correct operation
has been verified, remove the resistor and replace the field wiring.
• Online - To provide a constant check of the Analyzer/Controller’s operation in a
critical process, connect the conductivity cell to the Cell 1 input terminals; instead of
a Cell 2 input, install a check resistor at the Cell 2 input terminals. The Cell 2
“process value” should always be the appropriate value for the resistor (see equations
below). Configure an alarm to monitor this value.
Set cal factor and calibration trim for ideal conditions
When a check resistor is used instead of cell input, the Analyzer/Controller must be set
for theoretically ideal conditions to achieve display of the appropriate value for the
installed resistor. This means that you set the cell calibration factor to 1.00 and remove
the calibration trim for the cell input being replaced by the check resistor.
Calculations for conductivity, resistivity, and TDS
To verify instrument operation at any point of measurement, calculate the check
resistance needed to simulate that value. (It is assumed that you have selected a display
measurement value that is within the range of your cell constant; see 2.1for ranges.) The
equation used depends on the measurement type. For concentration check values see the
table on the following page.
Conductivity check resistance (ohms) = Cell Constant (cm-1) x 106
Conductivity (microSiemens/cm)
Resistivity check resistance (ohms) = Cell Constant (cm-1) x Resistivity (ohm-cm)
TDS check resistance (ohms) = Cell Constant (cm-1) x 106
TDS (ppm)/TDS factor
(TDS factor has units of ppm/microSiemens-cm-1)
216
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Example 1: To determine the check resistor value needed to simulate conductivity
measurement of 10 μS, use cell constant 0.1 and perform the following calculation:
10 k ohms = (0.1) x (1,000,000)
10
Example 2: To determine the check resistor value needed to simulate resistivity
measurement of 10 M ohms, use cell constant 0.01 and perform the following
calculation:
100 K ohms = (0.01) x (10,000,000)
Concentration values
Obtain the appropriate check resistance value from the table below.
Table 15-1 Data for Concentration Range Measurements
Material/Weight % Concentration
Simulation Resistance (ohms) @ 25º C
Cell Constant
10
25
50
Hydrochloric Acid (HCl)
0
1
4
∞
242.5
68.9
∞
485.0
137.7
Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4)
0
1
4
∞
215.5
56.0
∞
538.7
140.0
∞
1077.4
280.0
Sodium Chloride (NaCl)
0
1
4
∞
574.1
195.2
∞
∞
1435.1
398.0
2870.3
796.1
Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH)
0
1
4
∞
189.2
54.0
∞
473.0
135.1
∞
946.1
270.1
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
15.8Appendix G – Noise Testing, Dissolved Oxygen Application
Hints for Reducing Noise
Specifications for proper operation of Honeywell dissolved oxygen (DO) probes demand
that the alternating current (AC) voltage signal (noise) between anode and shield
connections and cathode and shield connections be less than 1 mV AC.
While it is your responsibility to assure that this specification is met, the following are
some hints that have been successful in reducing these signals to the required value in a
variety of installations.
1. First eliminate external connections as a source of excess AC noise.
2. After installation of all wiring, use a digital voltmeter to check the following
voltages:
Anode - Shield
1.2 to 2.0 VDC depending on oxygen level
less than 1 mV AC. In low ppb measurements, this
value may be zero.
Cathode - Shield
< 1 mV DC
less than 1 mV AC
3. Any readings greater than the limits shown above indicate electrical noise that should
be corrected.
4. Systematically remove external connections to the Analyzer, noting if the voltage
drops within the acceptable limit.
5. If a noise source is identified, improved shielding, grounding or re-routing of that
cable may be required. (In attempting to reduce AC noise, do not ground the shield as
this shunt filtering is designed to reduce electromagnetic interferences {EMC}.)
6. If the measured voltages are greater than procedures states, one at a time remove an
external connection (ex., isolated outputs and relays) and re-measure the AC signal. If
the AC signal has decreased after disconnecting one of these connections, then this
was the source of the noise.
7. If the noise remains at a value greater than 1 mV AC after disconnecting all external
connections described in step 1, disconnect the shield wire from Terminal 7 and
connect it to instrument ground inside the case.
8. If the noise remains at a value greater than 1 mV AC after performing step 2,
reconnect the shield wire to Terminal 7 and connect an additional (jumper) wire from
ground to the shield connection, Terminal 7.
If these steps fail to reduce the Anode-Shield and Cathode-Shield AC signals to the
specified 1mV AC or less, obtain an isolated transformer and power the analyzer from
that.
218
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
15.9Appendix H – DO Probe and Analyzer Tests
Before performing air leak detection, it is necessary to determine that both Probe and
Analyzer are working properly.
Assumptions:
• The probe and analyzer should be connected, the analyzer powered-up, and the probe
in the process water for at least 24 hours prior to testing.
• No additional configuration should be done.
• The process is as it would be normally. All equipment in the process is online and
contributing to the process. This is to ensure that the Probe and Analyzer are working
in a known environment.
Check for probe membrane leakage
If the probe has membrane leaks, incorrect readings may occur. Follow this procedure to
check for probe membrane leakage:
1. Remove probe from analyzer and process.
2. Using either the flow chamber or original protective adapter, screw this piece on the
probe. If using the adapter, wrap electrical tape around the adapter to seal the holes.
3. Next, wrap electrical tape around the hole on the side of the probe. The intent is to
create a reservoir for the sealed probe.
4. Position probe with the membrane pointing up.
5. Make a solution of salt water using 2 T. of salt and 8 oz. of water.
6. Fill the probe (via the adapter or flow chamber opening) with the salt water until
water is overflowing from the top of the reservoir.
7. If using the adapter or a PVC flow through chamber, place a wire (uncurled paper
clip) in adapter or flow through chamber opening such that one end is immersed in
the salt water solution. If using a Stainless Steel (SS) flow chamber, you do not need
the wire.
8. Using a DVM that can measure Mohms, attach one DVM lead to the paper clip (or
touch side of SS flow through chamber) and the other DVM lead to the cathode
(black lead). Measure the impedance between the Cathode and the wire (probe side).
If the probe has no leakage problem, this resistance will be greater than 1 Mohm. Go
to Step 10. If the reading is in the k ohms or ohms range, there is a leak in the
membrane, which can cause erratic readings in the probe. Stop any further testing
until the probe is replaced.
9. If you are here, it has been confirmed that there are no membrane leaks in the DO
probe. Remove the tape and wire from probe and rinse probe with tap water. Go to
Steps 9 – 16 on the following pages.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Check that analyzer is working
1. Remove power from analyzer.
2. Disconnect the probe and put the following resistor values on the terminal block of
the analyzer:
• Jumper (bare wire) - Anode(8) to Ref(9)
• 10k resistor - Ref(9) to Cathode(10)
• 5k resistor across thermistor leads - 4 and 5
3. Turn analyzer back on.
4. If you see a reading of between 5 and 10 ppm or 5000 and 10000 ppb at 25°C, the
analyzer is working correctly.
5. If not, the analyzer maybe the problem. Consult Honeywell TAC for support.
Check that the analyzer and probe are working together correctly.
1. If not already done, connect the probe to the analyzer and power up the analyzer. Put
probe in a bucket of water for approx. 1 hour so it can stabilize before proceeding.
2. Expose probe to ambient air for 3-5 minutes or until the temperature is stable.
3. Press the Display key on the Analyzer until the following parameters DO,
TEMPerature, SALinity, and PRESSure are showing on the analyzer’s display.
4. Perform a Visual Check on these parameters while the probe is in ambient Air:
5. The Temperature is not flashing and is between 15 - 35 Deg C.
6. DO’s Barometric Pressure is approx. in the range of 500 to 600 mmHg.
7. The Salinity value should be 0.0 PPT. (Indicates that Salinity is turned OFF).
8. If any of the above parameters are incorrect, make the necessary changes to correct
them so that they are as stated above.
9. Perform an air calibration.
10. When air calibration is completed, look at the DO value and the Temperature on the
Analyzer’s display.
11. Confirm that these two parameters are correct by comparing them to values in Table
15-1. If the measured values are not similar to the table, the probe is suspect, call
*TAC for assistance.
12. With probe still in air, perform a Probe Bias Test under the Maintenance Menu.
13. When completed, the display should look exactly like Figure 8-5 under Probe Bias
Test. If it does, move to Step 16.
14. If the problem is a shift of the curve either to the left or right of the cursor, move the
cursor so that it is positioned on the flat portion of the curve. At this point, the probe
is suspect and should be sent to the Technical assistance Center for analysis. If the
220
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
problem is that the cursor is positioned too far to the left or right of the flat portion of
the curve, move the cursor back to the flat portion of the curve.
15. Perform another Air Calibration to correct any changes that occurred during the PBT.
16. If you reached this point, you have both a working probe and analyzer that are
calibrated to one another correctly.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
15.10Appendix I – Parameters Affecting Dissolved Oxygen
Measurement
The actual quantity of oxygen that can be present in solution is governed by the partial
pressure of the gas in the atmosphere, the solubility in solution, the temperature and
purity of the solution.
Pressure
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzers include an internal pressure sensor and software
algorithm that automatically compensates for atmospheric pressure variations during
calibration. Pressure variations have a direct effect on the dissolved oxygen concentration
during normal measurement so no pressure compensation is applied at that time. The
information given below is only for reference to published solubility tables and is not
needed for operation of the Analyzer.
The equilibrium concentration of oxygen dissolved in a liquid is directly proportional to
the partial pressure of oxygen in the vapor phase with which the solution is in contact.
Dry air, which contains 20.9% oxygen, will have an oxygen partial pressure of 159
mmHg if the total pressure is 760 mmHg. Tables of oxygen solubility are normally
referenced to this value. An altitude or pressure correction must be made when conditions
differ from this level. The correction is made using the following equation:
S = S’ (P - p)/(760 - p)
where:
S is the solubility at barometric pressure of interest (P)
S’ is the solubility at 760 mmHg at a given temperature
P is the barometric pressure
p is the partial pressure of water at the given temperature
Temperature
Honeywell dissolved oxygen probes and analyzers include temperature sensors and an
automatic temperature compensation algorithm. The algorithm takes the raw oxygen
signal from the probe (which is proportional to the partial pressure of oxygen) and
converts it into the actual concentration of oxygen at the measuring temperature. The
algorithm is based on the decreasing solubility of oxygen with increasing temperature
and on the probe temperature coefficient.
Salinity
The significant effect of dissolved solids on reducing oxygen solubility is well
documented. However, the partial pressure of oxygen (raw oxygen probe signal) is the
same whether in pure or saline water. Since the actual solubility is reduced, a correction
must be made when measuring brackish, sea or other water containing much more than 1
ppt (1000 ppm) of dissolved solids. The Analyzer includes a salinity correction
algorithm, which uses input from a fixed value of salinity in ppt (parts-per-thousand)
entered from the front panel. Suspended and settled solids have negligible effect on
solubility, but may affect the transfer rate of oxygen when in excess of 2%.
222
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
15.11 Appendix J – Discussion on Chemical Interferences on
Measured DO Currents
There are four contributors to measured current:
Faradaic Currents
Faradaic currents are those resulting from oxidation or reduction of chemical species.
The reduction of oxygen to water, the oxidation of water to oxygen, and the oxidation of
hydrogen, hydrazine or sulfur dioxide, are examples of Faradaic currents.
Residual Currents
Residual currents are unwanted Faradaic currents caused by impurities in the probe
electrolyte. These impurities are metals (e.g. lead, zinc) in electrolyte reagents, which are
capable of being reduced at the cathode and give rise to zero offset currents at “zero ppb
oxygen”.
Electrode Conditioning Currents
The platinum cathode and anode materials are actually made up of conducting platinum
oxides. These oxides exist at the molecular level. The actual platinum surface state
strongly affects the observed Faradaic currents. Before methods of wire conditioning
were established, upwards of 96 hours was needed to allow these conditioning currents to
stabilize. Once wire-conditioning methods were established, it now takes approximately
24 hours for these conditioning currents to completely stabilize. Electrode conditioning
currents occur on first probe power-ups, following power interruptions of more than 1
second (back-up power is provided for the probe to prevent this current during a power
outage of 1 hour or less) and following a Probe Bias test.
Charging Currents
The Dissolved Oxygen (DO) probe consists of closely spaced bi-filar platinum windings
separated by a high dielectric constant material. This is a description of a capacitor; the
capacitance of a DO probe is in the hundreds if microFarads. When the probe is scanned
during a Probe Bias Test(PBT) at 25mV/sec, an appreciable charging current is
observed. This is equivalent to several hundred ppb dissolved oxygen.
The purpose of the PBT is to verify the optimum operating range of the current/voltage
curve. It further allows one to determine if a reference shift has occurred. Most
importantly, it allows one to select to identify a new bias point, if one is needed. To
employ this diagnostic, you should be in air or air saturated water (ppm current is in uA
range). A PBT should not be performed in a ppb application (ppb current is in nA range),
due to charging and electrode currents being at a maximum value (µA range) during one
of these scans. Furthermore, the final current rise during the PBT produces both
hydrogen and oxygen gases within the probe. Time is needed before these gases can re-
establish equilibrium with the outside sample. Therefore, the PBT should be limited to air
level conditions and adequate time should be allowed for probe recovery following a
PBT.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Faradaic Interferences
The DO probe responds to oxygen partial pressure as follows:
O2 + 4H+ + 4e- → 2H2O
(1)
Reaction (1) is a chemical reduction in which dissolved oxygen is reduced to water. This
reduction occurs at the working electrode, commonly referred to as the cathode. The
equal and opposite (oxidation) reaction occurs at the counter electrode (anode). Any
gaseous substance, which is permeable through the membrane and is capable of being
oxidized or reduced (electroactive) at the working electrode will interfere. Cl2, O3, H2,
N2H4 and SO2 are examples of interfering dissolved gases.
Cl2+ 2e- → 2Cl-
H2 → 2H+ + 2e-
(2)
(3)
Reaction (2) is a reduction and hence a positive interference will be observed; reaction
(3) is an oxidation, which will result in a negative interference. All amperometric probes
are subject to reduction or oxidation interference as shown above. In addition to the
direct interference shown in these two equations, the equilibrium probe provides an
additional indirect interference. In normal probe operation oxygen is consumed at the
working electrode and an equal amount of oxygen is produced at the counter electrode.
In a positive interference condition, such as (2) above, chlorine is reduced at the working
electrode and an equivalent amount of oxygen is produced at the anode. This oxygen is
electroactive, along with the dissolved chlorine and is a contributor to the measured
current.
In the absence of dissolved oxygen and in a negative interference situation as in (3),
hydrogen gas is consumed at the working electrode and the opposite reaction, the
reduction of water to hydrogen gas occurs at the counter electrode. In this hydrogen
interference mode, the probe is both consuming and producing equal amounts of
hydrogen, and is operating in a hydrogen detection equilibrium mode.
In cases of electrochemical interference, if the interference is positive, dissolved oxygen
will be produced at the counter electrode giving a perceived higher oxygen reading. If
the interference is negative, dissolved hydrogen gas will be produced at the counter
electrode giving a perceived zero oxygen reading.
Sulfite Based Zero Testing
Often as a quick check to determine if a DO probe can reach 0.0 ppb, you can immerse
the probe in a solution of sodium sulfite (Na2SO3) or sodium meta bisulfite (Na2S2O5). A
2 to 5% by weight solution in water is sufficient. If available, a small level of coboltous
ion CO2+ will act as a catalyst and speed up the reaction of oxygen with the scavenger.
Note: The lifetime of this solution is related to its exposure to air. Namely, the greater the
exposure, the shorter the lifetime.
However, a Honeywell proven low ppb DO test using Nitrogen, an oxygen displacer, is
recommended in Appendix M – Procedure for Low Level ppb Dissolved Oxygen Testing
of this manual.
224
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
15.12Appendix K – Percent Saturation Readout
In some special applications, it is desirable to read out in percent saturation rather than concentration. These are usually in non-
aqueous solutions where the normal temperature compensation of the Series UDA2182 Analyzer for the solubility of air/oxygen
in water does not apply. The percent saturation readout disables this solubility part of the temperature compensation. The
readout is 100% when measuring in air or in a solution saturated with air, regardless of the temperature. Thus an air calibration
will always produce approximately a 100% saturation readout. With this readout, salinity should be left at zero since the normal
salinity correction also does not apply to non-aqueous media.
When percent saturation readout is selected, the on-line displays read in percent saturation, however, all the dissolved oxygen
settings in the Analyzer remain in concentration units (ppm or ppb). Therefore, percent saturation alarms, output, etc. Should be
used only if the process temperature is nearly constant.
For example, assume it is desired to have an alarm setpoint at 75% saturation while operating at 20°C. The corresponding
setpoint is the 0.75 x 9.07 = 6.80 ppm.
Table 15-2 Dissolved Oxygen Solubility vs. Temperature
(From Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater)
Sample
Temperature
(°C)
Solubility
(ppm, mg/L)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
14.60
14.19
13.81
13.44
13.09
12.75
12.43
12.12
11.83
11.55
11.27
11.01
10.76
10.52
10.29
10.07
9.85
9.65
9.45
9.26
9.07
8.90
8.72
8.56
8.40
8.24
8.09
7.95
7.81
7.67
7.54
7.41
7.28
7.16
7.05
6.93
6.82
6.71
6.61
6.51
6.41
6.31
6.22
6.13
6.04
5.95
5.86
5.78
5.70
5.62
5.54
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
15.13Appendix L – Leak Detection in PPB Applications
Before performing air leak detection, it is necessary to determine that both the probe and
analyzer are working properly. Refer to Probe and Analyzers tests in Section 15.9
1. First, check to see that the probe contains an O-ring. Per the probe directions, an O-
ring must go into a probe that is used in ppb applications. This creates a tight seal
between the probe and flow chamber. MAKE SURE THIS O-RING IS IN THE
PROBE.
2. Unless already in air, open the probe to air for 30 seconds.
3. Put it back into the process again.
4. Allow the DO to drift down to the 20-30 ppb range. The 20-30 ppb range was chosen
because the reading was low enough that the drift was small with respect to the
changes observed for various flow rates but high enough that changes could be
observed.
5. At this range, vary the flow rate from 10 to 100 ml/min. These low flow rates were
selected for two reasons. The first, the tester may only have a 0 - 100 ml/min flow
indicator. The other reason is a leak that exists at this low flow, will cause a change in
the DO reading.
6. If the DO value at 10 ml/min exceeds the DO value at 100 ml/min, a leak is present in
the sampling line.
7. Fixing the leak may require plastic tubing to be replaced with metal tubing, tape to be
put on fittings, and/or fittings at the bottom of the probe to be tightened securely.
8. Now, repeat Steps 2 - 6 until the flow can be changed from >100 ml/min to 10 ml/min
with no change in the DO value.
226
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
15.14Appendix M – Procedure for Low Level ppb Dissolved Oxygen
Testing
Overview
The purpose of this procedure is two-fold. First, using a controlled environment, new
probes and/or analyzers can be tested to determine if each is performing correctly before
being installed in the field. Second, this procedure can be used to re-test the performance
of an existing analyzer and/or probe.
You may choose to use this set-up for a zero calibration test. However, a zero calibration
test would require, as a minimum, modifications to two of the test parameters. One
modification would require a closed loop water system. The sample water must be
tapped directly from the customer’s process water. The other modification would be the
gas. For zero calibration, a high purity nitrogen gas (very expensive) must be piped into
the process sample. Since Honeywell can neither control the quality of the gas the
customer purchases nor the quality of the process water used, the company will not
guarantee the accuracy of the results of a zero calibration done by this modified method.
Equipment Needed
• One Tank of Oxygen in Nitrogen gas mixture
• One pressure regulator/shutoff valve
• Wash bottle - used to add moisture to the sample gas before the gas reaches the
probe. (Without addition of moisture, the Nitrogen gas would dry out the probe
membrane.)
• One Beaker - used to vent the gas sample
• One Dissolved Oxygen probe - used to make DO measurement
• One Dissolved Oxygen flow through chamber - provide a closed environment
• One Honeywell Model UDA2182 Analyzer - monitors and displays DO value.
Oxygen Measurement Procedure
1. Connect probe and energize the electronics.
2. Allow probe to sit in tap water for 1 hour.
3. Perform an air calibration per the manual instructions.
4. Set-up equipment as shown in Figure 15-7.
5. Install probe into sealed flow chamber and connect to wash bottle piping.
6. Set room temperature to 25°C and sparge water with nitrogen overnight. Reading
should be less than 1 ppb.
7. Remove probe from flow chamber and expose to 25°C air for 2 hours.
8. Perform an air calibration.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
9. Return probe to flow chamber and resume nitrogen sparging.
10. When analyzer indicates that DO level is below 20 ppb, change gas to 250 ppm O2 in
nitrogen. Run until equilibrated (4-6 hours). After equalization, note barometric
pressure and temperature.
11. Compare reading with calculated value.
To Calculate True Value
*Air Sat. Value at T °C x known gas O2 Value x Barometric Pressure = True Value
20.9% 760 mmHg
Example Calculation
At 25°C using 250 ppm O2 in N2 at 770 mm Hg
True Value = 8.24 x 10-6 x 250 x 10-6 x 770 = 9.986 x 10-9 or 10 ppb
20.9 x 10-2
760
* If the temperature of the process water is not at 25°C, use O2 Solubility Tables in Table
15-2 and the process water temperature to determine the Air Saturated O2 value.
Honeywell Model 2182
Universal Dual Analyzer
Special Requirements:
Note 1:Gas Mixture is Oxygen in Nitrogen- use GravametricGases analyzed
to +/- 1% of contained gas. Get Certificates of Conformance and Analyisson the
purchased gas.
Note 2:Dual Stage, Ultra high purity, high flow pressure regulato-r
non-corrosive surface. Try to get this from the gas supplier to bceonsistent with
their recommended setup. Example supplier- Scott Model-18 Series.
Note 3:
Glass Gas Washing bottles with fritted disc and beaker. Gas btotle should
be filled 3/4 with water. Example supplier- Fisher, Cole Palmer
Note 4:Piping around glass wash bottle should be heavy wall flexiblelpastic. Piping
that goes into beaker should be submerged about 1/2” into beakeorf water.
Note 5:All other piping should be rigid polypropylene tubing.
Note 6:All calculations are based on 25 Deg C.
Dissolved
Oxygen Probe
Model DL5PPB
Rigid Piping
Note 5
Flow Through
Chamber
#31063336 or
Regulator Note 2
#31063337
Valve
Note 1
Note 4
Oxygen
in
Nitrogen
Beaker
for Venting
Flexible
Piping
Wash Bottle
1/ 2”
Note 4
Note 3
Figure 15-7 Suggested ppb Dissolved Oxygen Test Set-up
228
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
15.15Appendix N – Sample Tap Electrode Mounting
Recommendations
Overview
Many applications tap a sample from a main process stream and, after the flow has
passed through the measurement manifold, it is discharged to a sink or floor drain.
Typical Probe Installation
A typical probe installation will find the probe mounted in a flow chamber or tee
arrangement similar to what is shown in Figure 15-8. Key installation features are
provision for flow rate adjustment, a water trap to assure that the probe remains
immersed if sample flow is turned off and means to prevent a below atmospheric pressure
within the manifold.
AIR
VENT
Air vent prevents vaccuum
in discharge to drain line
avoiding air leaks and
resulting problems.
pH, ORP,
Conductivity
or DO
PROBE
3 - 6" Water trap
keeps probe tip wet
when sample water
is turned off
DRAIN
OPTIONAL 3-WAY
VALVE AND DRAIN
FOR DISSOLVED
OXYGEN INSTALLATIONS
FLOW
METER
FLOW
DRAIN
Figure 15-8 Typical Probe Installation
It is desirable for water to exit the manifold 3 to 6 inches above the sensor tip. This will
insure that the sensor remains immersed if sample flow is turned off.
The air vent extension is sized so normal sample flow does not completely fill this tube.
Its purpose is to prevent negative pressure within the manifold. Without this air vent, if
for example the exit stream is discharged to a floor drain four feet below the manifold,
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
then the pressure at the sensor is four feet water-column below atmospheric pressure.
Any fitting leaks at or beyond the flow adjustment valve will result in air infiltration into
the sample. This entrapped air can result in noisy and unstable measurement. In the case
of a part per billion dissolved oxygen (DO) measurement, the indicated DO value can be
substantially higher than the true value.
When it becomes necessary to discharge the sample stream in a loop higher than the
manifold, then the air vent should be located above the highest point in the loop.
230
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
15.16Appendix O – Auto Clean and Auto Cal Examples
Automatic Cleaning and Calibration
Overview
Although the Honeywell probe accuracy is unaffected by inert fouling, there are two
conditions where probe cleaning may be required. (These conditions affect all
conventional dissolved oxygen probes as well.)
The first is where the fouling is so thick that the response time of the probe becomes
unacceptably long. The second is where organic fouling is consuming oxygen before it
reaches the surface of the probe.
A feature allowing automatic cleaning at preconfigured times is included in the
UDA2182 analyzer. Cleaning may be initiated with a frequency of every few minutes to
monthly.
Cleaning
Functionally, relays within the analyzer are tripped, allowing withdrawal of the probe
from the sample, turning on a cleaning spray, turning off the spray, and reinserting the
probe into the sample. Execution of automatic cleaning and calibration requires you to
install a drive unit, a solenoid valve, and mounting hardware. See Figure 15-9
Calibration
Similarly, all probes drift with time. Although the Honeywell probe is very stable,
included in the analyzer is a feature that allows withdrawal of the probe into air for
automatic air calibration at user-configured times.
The sequence of calibrations and cleanings are user-configurable.
Low Dissolved Oxygen
One symptom of the need for cleaning is a low dissolved oxygen reading. The UDA2182
dissolved oxygen analyzer can be configured to execute a cleaning cycle if the measured
dissolved oxygen falls below a user-selected value. An alarm can be configured to alert
you if the cleaning fails to restore the dissolved oxygen to a higher level. The alarm will
indicate either a true decrease in dissolved oxygen concentration or unsuccessful
cleaning.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Figure 15-9 Auto Clean Setup
232
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Automatic Calibration of ppb Dissolved Oxygen Probe
A typical set – up for automatic calibration in a boiler water sampling system is shown in
Figure 15-10. The solenoid valve and connections should be supplied by others and must
be positively air tight to prevent leakage and erroneous measurements.
The solenoid valve is wired to assigned relay contacts in the UDA2182 analyzer and will
operate at a frequency, and for duration as assigned by the end user.
Figure 15-10 Auto Cal Setup
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
15.17 Appendix P – AutoClean and AutoCal Theory and Piping
Overview
Periodic calibration of pH electrodes is necessary for best system performance because
electrode outputs change over time. One-point calibration (standardization) is a zero
adjustment to compensate for electrode drift. Two-point calibration (standardization and
slope adjustment) includes a span adjustment to match the gain of the
Analyzer/Controller to the electrode response. Standardization and slope each depend on
the electrode measuring a reference solution (buffer) of known pH.
The AutoClean and AutoCal features periodically rinse and calibrate pH electrodes
automatically as described in this section. To take advantage of these features you must:
• Select them during I/O setup (Section 6.15)
• Set the clock (Section 6.18), and specify the frequency and duration of the cleaning and
calibration operations. (Section 6.15)
• Configure the system to use automatic buffer recognition. (Section 8.5.2).
•Wire the relays assigned to these operations during system setup to operate the
necessary valves. (Section 7.3).
• Install piping and valves as diagrammed in this section.
AutoClean Sequence and Piping
Rinse sequence
The AutoClean operation occurs at the configured intervals. The sequence is described
below.
1
All alarm action is held at existing levels. The output(s) can be held or be active, depending on
configuration. Even if the outputs are not held, “HOLD ACTIVE” is displayed on the alarm stripe
because alarms are always held.
Also, “AUTOSEQUENCE” is displayed. Pressing the DISPLAY key will call up a special display that
shows how much time is left in the operation.
2
3
4
Relay 1 activates 3-way solenoid valve S1 (see Figure 15-11) to direct rinsing fluid to the electrodes
for the configured rinse duration (1 to 1999 seconds). If the measured sample is normally returned
to the process but quantities of rinsing fluid cannot be tolerated there, use an additional 3-way
solenoid valve S4. It is activated simultaneously with S1 to divert the discharge to drain.
At the end of the configured rinse time Relay 1 de-activates the solenoid valve S1 (and S4, if used).
After the configured delay period (1 to 1999 seconds) the Analyzer/Controller resumes sampling the
process. (Note that even with S4 for diversion, one system volume of washing fluid will pass to the
process at this point.)
The “HOLD” and “AUTOSEQUENCE” messages are cleared.
Note that the operator can make the operation pause using the special AutoClean display.
If the operator does not remove the pause by pressing the PAUSE soft key again, the
Analyzer/Controller will resume normal operation after 20 minutes.
234
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
rinse/cleaning
solution
9782
to process
S4
pH
electrode
to drain
S1
process
sample
Items outside this area
provided byuser
Figure 15-11 Automatic Electrode Wash Setup
Select valves and fittings with appropriate pressure ratings
Make the process connections as shown in Figure 15-11. Be sure that valves and fittings
(S1) have sufficient pressure ratings to withstand pressure peaks which will occur when
process flow is blocked.
Minimize liquid volume in system
Keep pipe sizes small and couplings close to minimize the liquid volume in the system.
Smaller volumes require less time to rinse.
15.17.1
AutoCal Sequence and Piping
Introduction
AutoCal can include one-point calibration (standardization) to adjust zero to compensate
for electrode drift, or two-point calibration (standardization and slope adjustment) to also
adjust span to match the gain of the Analyzer/Controller to the electrode response.
Standardization and slope each depend on the electrode measuring a reference solution
(buffer) of known pH.
Rinse and one-point calibration sequence
The AutoCal operation automatically occurs at the configured intervals. It always
includes AutoClean rinsing of the pH electrode, in addition to any other AutoClean
sequences that are configured to occur between standardization operations. The sequence
is described below.
1
2
All alarm action is held at existing levels. The output(s) can be held or be active, depending on
configuration. Even if the outputs are not held, “HOLD ACTIVE” is displayed on the alarm stripe
because alarms are always held.
Also, “AUTOSEQUENCE” is displayed. Pressing the DISPLAY key will call up a special display
that shows how much time is left in the operation
In preparation for the calibration, Relay 1 activates 3-way solenoid valve S1 (see Figure 15-12) to
direct rinsing fluid to the electrodes for the configured rinse duration (1 to 1999 seconds). If the
measured sample is normally returned to the process but quantities of rinsing fluid cannot be
tolerated there, use an additional 3-way solenoid valve S4. It is activated simultaneously with S1 to
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
divert the discharge to drain.
3
4
Relay 2 activates solenoid valve S2 for the preset buffer time (1 to 1999 seconds) to direct buffer
solution past the electrodes by gravity.
After a stable reading is reached or the set maximum buffer time elapses, the 9782 stores the new
calibration value using automatic buffer recognition. Diagnostics detect excessive instability or
offset, prevent erroneous calibrating and can activate an alarm, depending on configuration. If the
diagnostic fails, an error message is always displayed on the alarm stripe (see Section 12).
If an unacceptable value is obtained, it will be rejected and the previous value will be retained for
uninterrupted operation.
5
6
All valves are deactivated to resume measurement of the sample.
A delay period (1 to 1999 seconds) can be configured to permit the measurement to stabilize on the
process sample. At the end of the delay period normal alarm, control and output operation
resumes. The “HOLD” and “AUTOSEQUENCE” messages are cleared.
Items outside this area
provided by user
buffer
solution
9782
to process
pH
S4
electrode
to drain
S2
process
sample
rinse water
S 1
Figure 15-12 Rinse and One-Point Calibration
Rinse and two-point calibration sequence
With this function, rinse and one-point standardization operations are performed as
described previously according to the configured schedule. If two-point calibration is to
be performed periodically, then after the configured number of standardization
operations, Steps 4a and 4b shown below are also performed (before Step 5 above) to
make the slope adjustment.
4a
Relay 3 activates solenoid valve S3 for the configured buffer time to direct the second buffer flow to
the electrodes.
4b
After stability is reached or the set maximum buffer time elapses, the instrument calculates and
stores a new slope value using automatic buffer recognition. Diagnostics detect excessive
instability or offset, prevent erroneous calibrating and can activate an alarm, depending on
configuration. If the diagnostic fails, an error message is always displayed on the alarm stripe (see
Section 9).
If an unacceptable value is obtained, it will be rejected and the previous value will be retained for
uninterrupted operation.
236
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Select piping and valves based on chemical resistance and pressure ratings
Make the process connections as shown in Figure 15-12 or Figure 15-13. Materials and
components should be carefully selected for chemical resistance to process and buffer
solutions at anticipated temperatures. Be sure that valves and fittings have sufficient
pressure ratings to withstand pressure peaks which will occur when process flow is
blocked.
Minimize liquid volume in system
Keep pipe sizes small and couplings close to minimize the liquid volume in the system.
Smaller volumes require less buffer solution and less time to rinse and to calibrate.
Items outside this area
provided by user
S3
buffer
solution 1
buffer
solution 2
9782
to process
pH
electrode
S4
to drain
S2
process
sample
rinse water
S1
Two-Point Calibration
Alarms Held
Relay1 Activated
Rinse Duration
Standardize Duration, Relay 2 Activated
Slope Duration, Relay3 Activated
(Same Period as Standardize)
Resume DelayTime (seconds)
NormalOperation
1.709"
TIME
Interval Between
Cleaning/Calibration
(daysor hours)
Two-Point AutoCalTOM peration*
* One-point AutoCal and AutoClean operations omit
steps using Relay 3 and Relays 2 & 3, respectively.
Figure 15-13 Two-Point AutoCal Operation
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
238
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
3-mode control .........................................................91
Auto Cycle Fail Messages......................................191
Auto Cycle Start Source.................................100, 102
Auto Cycling.............................................44, 100, 102
Auto Cycling Configuration.......................................99
Auto Permit ..............................................................95
Auto range functions ................................................80
Automatic buffer recognition.......................................3
Automatic Buffer recognition ..........................138, 140
Automatic Calibration of ppb Dissolved Oxygen Probe
...........................................................................230
Aux Values...............................................................43
Auxiliary Configuration .............................................88
A
Absolute Value.........................................................85
Accessing Alarms Menu...........................................81
Accessing Auto Cycle Menu.............................99, 100
Accessing Auxiliary Menu ........................................89
Accessing Communication Menu...................104, 105
Accessing Control Menu ..........................................93
Accessing Inputs Menu............................................62
Accessing Logic Menu .............................................86
Accessing Maintenance Menu ...............................107
Accessing Math Menu..............................................84
Accessing Monitors Menu ........................................82
Accessing Outputs Menu .........................................73
Accessing Relays Menu...........................................75
Accessing the Main Calibration Menu and sub-menus
...................................................135, 176, 183, 186
Accessing the Main Menu ........................................52
Accessing the terminals .........................................115
Accessories............................................................194
Accutune..................................................................96
Air Calibration.........................................................163
Air Calibration Method............................................164
Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 Type...........................................98
Alarm Conditions....................................................189
Alarm Hysteresis......................................................98
Alarm n is active.....................................................189
Alarm Status.............................................................41
Alarm types ........................................................81, 82
Alarm/ Control Relays ................................................6
Alarm/Control Settings ...............................................6
Alarms Configuration................................................80
Amine pH ...............................................................109
Ammonia pH ..........................................................109
Analog and Digital Signal Sources ...........................57
Analog Output ............................................................5
analog outputs........................................................117
Analog Signal Sources.............................................58
Analyzer Overview ...................................................21
AND .........................................................................87
Appendices ............................................................196
Atmospheric pressure compensation.......................71
Auto Buffer Recognition .............................................6
Auto Clean and Auto Cal Examples .......................228
Auto Cycle 1 Calibration Point 1...............................60
Auto Cycle 1 Calibration Point 2...............................60
Auto Cycle 1 Failure.................................................60
Auto Cycle 1 Probe Extraction .................................60
Auto Cycle 1 Probe Rinse ........................................60
Auto Cycle 2 Calibration Point 1...............................60
Auto Cycle 2 Calibration Point 2...............................60
Auto Cycle 2 Failure.................................................60
Auto Cycle 2 Probe Extraction .................................60
Auto Cycle 2 Probe Rinse ........................................60
Auto Cycle Displays .................................................28
Auto Cycle Fail.........................................................32
B
Bargraphs Overview.................................................23
Basic Configuration Procedure.................................55
Bias........................................................63, 65, 71, 95
Bias Constant.........................................63, 65, 70, 71
Bias Scan...............................................................169
Block Diagram..........................................................51
Breakpoints ..............................................................88
Buffer Span Too Low .............................................191
Buffer Span Too Low .............................................190
Buffering Method of Calibrating pH Electrodes ......142
C
Cal Factor ........................................................67, 154
Cal Factor Overrange.............................................190
Cal Factor Underrange...........................................190
Calc Values..............................................................44
Calibrating the Percent Slope.................................139
Calibration Diagnostics...........................................190
Calibration History..................................................186
Calibration Menu....................................................135
Calibration Trim......................................136, 156, 159
Case Dimensions.......................................................7
Case Material.............................................................5
Cation Calc.............................................................109
Cation Calc Display..................................................37
Cation pH Calibration.............................................160
Cations.....................................................................37
CE Conformity (Europe).............................................7
Cell Constant............................................................67
Chrome Waste Treatment......................................205
Clear Cal History....................................................109
Clear Calibration History ........................................187
Clear Event History ..........................................46, 109
Clock......................................................................110
CO2 ........................................................................109
CO2 by Degassed Conductivity................................39
Comm Status ...........................................................43
Communication Configuration........................104, 105
Communications Card..............................................49
Communications Card (Optional)...............................2
Computed Variables...................................................3
Concentration...........................................................70
Cond Units Type ....................................................108
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Conditional Sequencer Steps...................................32
Conductivity......................................................66, 136
Conductivity Calibration..................................137, 154
Conductivity Compensations......................................6
Conductivity of Potassium Chloride Solutions at 25 °C
...........................................................................157
Conductivity Wiring Diagrams ................................128
Configuration............................................................50
Configuration Procedure ..........................................54
Conform to code.....................................................114
Contrast Adjustment.................................................23
Control Action...........................................................94
Control Algorithm .....................................................94
Control Loop/Outputs.................................................6
Current outputs ......................................................176
Cyanide Waste Treatment......................................201
Cycle Interval ...........................................30, 100, 102
Cycle Start Src .........................................................30
Cycle Time .............................................76, 77, 78, 79
F
Failsafe ..................................................63, 65, 70, 72
Failsafe Output Value...............................................94
Features.....................................................................3
Feed Forward Gain ..................................................95
Feedforward Source.................................................95
Filter Time........................................63, 65, 70, 72, 85
Frequency proportional output .................................77
Frequency Proportional Output ................................76
Function Generator ..................................................89
Function Generators ................................................88
Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression .................................96
G
Gain ...................................................................85, 96
Gain or Prop Band 2 ................................................97
General Rules for Editing .........................................54
General Wiring Practices..................................16, 113
Glass Meredian External Preamp ..........................124
Glass Meredian II...................................................120
D
Degassed CO2 .........................................................38
Derivative (D) ...........................................................91
DHCP.......................................................................49
Diagnostic/Failsafe Outputs .......................................4
Digital Output Relay ...........................................75, 76
Digital Signal Source..........................................58, 88
Digital Signal Sources..............................................59
Digital Source...........................................................76
Direct pH..................................................................62
Direct pH/ORP Wiring Diagrams............................118
Discussion on Chemical Interferences on Measured
DO Currents.......................................................220
Display .......................................................................5
Display Ranges..........................................................5
Display Test ...........................................................110
Displays..............................................................20, 23
Dissolved Oxygen ................................................3, 70
Dissolved Oxygen Calibration ................................163
Dissolved Oxygen Measurement................................6
Dissolved Oxygen Wiring Diagrams.......................129
DO Probe and Analyzer Tests................................216
DUPA.......................................................................94
DUPB.......................................................................94
Durafet II ................................................................119
Durafet II Cap Adapter ...........................................126
Durafet II External Preamp.....................................125
Durafet III ...............................................................118
Durafet III Cap Adapter ..........................................127
H
Header ...................................................................109
High Monitor.............................................................83
High Noise Immunity..................................................4
Hold Active...............................................................30
HOLD ACTIVE .......................................................189
Hold of Analog Inputs..............................................60
HPW7000.......................................................122, 123
Hysteresis ..........................................................81, 82
I, J
Immunity compliance..............................................113
Index ......................................................................236
Infrared communications..........................................48
Infrared Communications ...........................................2
Input 1 Fault .............................................................59
Input 2 Fault .............................................................59
INPUT BOARD n FAULT .......................................189
Input Calibration.....................................................134
Input Displays...........................................................25
Input Errors ............................................................189
Input Fault..............................................................191
INPUT n PROBE OUT OF SOLUTION..................189
INPUT n TEMP OPEN ...........................................189
Input Status..............................................................42
Inputs .........................................................................1
Inputs and Outputs.................................................115
Inputs and Outputs Wiring......................................112
Inputs Configuration.................................................62
Insert Wait Src........................................................100
Installation Ratings.....................................................7
installing Input and Output wiring ...........................117
Installing Power Wiring.............................................17
Integral (I).................................................................91
Invert................................................76, 77, 78, 79, 87
E
Enclosure rating .........................................................7
Entering Values for Lead Resistance Compensation
(Wide Range Only).....................................197, 199
Ethernet and Communications...............................193
Ethernet port ............................................................49
Ethernet TCP/IP Communications Interface...............7
Event History............................................................45
Extract Wait Src .....................................................100
K
Key Navigation.........................................................22
Keypad.......................................................................5
Keypad Test...........................................................110
240
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Output 3 Fault ..........................................................59
Output Bargraphs.....................................................24
Output Calibration ..................................................176
Output Errors..........................................................189
Output High Limit .....................................................93
Output High Limit Value ...........................................93
Output Level...........................................................111
Output Levels...........................................................42
Output Low Limit ......................................................93
Output Low Limit Value ............................................93
OUTPUT n OPEN..................................................189
Outputs ......................................................................2
Outputs Configuration ..............................................73
Outputs Wiring .......................................................132
Overview....................................................................1
L
Label ......................................................................109
Language ...............................................................107
LATCH .....................................................................87
Leak Detection in PPB Applications.......................223
Linear.......................................................................85
Local Setpoint Permit...............................................95
Log...........................................................................85
Logic Configuration ..................................................86
Logic Input A and B Source......................................87
Logic Status .............................................................42
Logic Type................................................................87
Low Level ppb Dissolved Oxygen Testing..............224
Low Monitor..............................................................83
M
P, Q
mA Limit High...........................................................73
mA Range High........................................................73
mA Range Low.........................................................73
Main Setup Menu.....................................................52
Mains Freq.............................................................107
Maintenance Configuration ....................................107
Manual Permit..........................................................95
Manual Select ..........................................................94
Math Configuration...................................................84
Math Type................................................................85
Math Values .............................................................43
Maximum wire size.................................................114
Measured Conductivity and Resistivity.......................3
Measured pH..............................................................3
Measurement Errors ..............................................189
Menu Indicators..................................................23, 52
Modbus Communications.........................................49
Monitor.....................................................................82
Monitor 1, 2, 3, 4 ......................................................82
Monitor Status..........................................................42
Monitor Type ............................................................82
Monitors Configuration.............................................82
Mounting ..........................................................7, 9, 10
Panel Mounting Dimensions.....................................11
Panel Mounting Procedure.......................................11
Parameters Affecting Dissolved Oxygen
Measurement .....................................................219
Part Numbers.........................................................195
Passwor Protection ....................................................4
Password ...............................................................107
Pct Range High............................................76, 77, 78
Pct Range Low.............................................76, 77, 78
Percent Saturation Readout...................................222
pH Amine pH............................................................38
pH Ammonia ............................................................38
PH Calibration........................................................138
pH Durafet..........................................................62, 64
pH Glass ............................................................62, 64
pH HPW...................................................................62
pH Input from External Preamplifier/Cap Adapter
Wiring Diagrams.................................................124
pH Offset................................................................162
pH Offset adjustment .............................................138
pH ORP....................................................................62
pH Preamp input card ..............................................64
pH/ORP Calibration................................................137
PH/ORP Calibration ...............................................136
pH/ORP/DO ...........................................................190
Pharm Tmr Mins.......................................................70
Pharma Display........................................................33
Pharma Fail Messages ..........................................192
Pharma Fail Signal...................................................36
PHARMA n PH OVERRANGE...............................192
PHARMA n PH UNDERRANGE ............................192
PHARMA n PV LIMIT WARN.................................192
PHARMA n PV OVERLIMIT...................................192
PHARMA n TEMP OVERRANGE..........................192
PHARMA n TEMP UNDERRANGE .......................192
PHARMA n TIMER ACTIVE...................................192
Pharma PV High ......................................................70
Pharma PV Low .......................................................70
Pharma Type............................................................70
Pharmacopoeia 1 Failure .........................................60
Pharmacopoeia 1 Warning.......................................60
Pharmacopoeia 2 Failure .........................................60
Pharmacopoeia 2 Warning.......................................60
PID A........................................................................94
PID Alarm Status......................................................41
N
Noise Testing, Dissolved Oxygen Application........215
O
Off Time ...................................................................76
Offset .......................................................................85
Offset Overrange....................................................191
Offset Underrange..................................................191
On / Off control relay................................................76
On / Off output ...................................................75, 78
On Delay......................................................81, 82, 87
On Time .................................................76, 77, 78, 79
Online Functions ......................................................24
Operating Conditions .................................................5
Operating the Analyzer.............................................20
Option Card............................................................133
OR............................................................................87
ORP ...........................................................62, 64, 121
ORP Calibration Using Reference Solution............148
ORP Calibration Using Voltage Input .....................151
Output 1 Fault ..........................................................59
Output 2 Fault ..........................................................59
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
PID Alarms...............................................................97
PID B........................................................................94
PID Configuration.....................................................93
PID Control.............................................................107
PID Control 1 Alarm 1 ..............................................60
PID Control 1 Alarm 2 ..............................................60
PID Control 2 Alarm 1 ..............................................60
PID Control 2 Alarm 2 ..............................................60
PID Control Configuration ........................................91
PID Display Editing ..................................................27
PID Displays.............................................................26
PID Tuning...............................................................96
Pipe Mounting ..........................................................13
Power Mode.............................................................94
Power Out ................................................................94
Power Requirements..................................................6
Power Supply/Analog Output/Relay Output Card...132
Power Wiring............................................................15
Power Wiring Considerations...................................17
Preamplifier Input Option............................................6
Precision Check Resistor ...............................196, 213
Pressure Calibration...............................................163
Pressure Calibration Method..................................168
Pressure Type..........................................................71
Probe Bias Scan ....................................................171
Probe Calibration Diagnostics................................190
Probe Current Too High.........................................190
Probe Current Too Low..........................................191
Probe Current Too Low..........................................190
Probe Extract Timeout ...........................................191
Probe Insert Timeout..............................................191
Probe Pv N Fault....................................................189
Probe Temp N Fault...............................................189
Probe Transit............................................................30
Procedure for Calibrating Analyzer Outputs...........178
Procedure for Calibrating the Temperature Inputs 183,
186
R
Range High ..............................................................73
Range Low...............................................................73
Rate 2 ......................................................................97
RATE action.............................................................96
Ratio.........................................................................94
Readings Unstable.................................................191
READINGS UNSTABLE ........................................190
Rear Panel Support Plate Dimensions.....................12
Recommended wire size..........................................17
Relay outputs .........................................................117
Relay state .............................................................111
Relay States.............................................................42
Relay Types .............................................................76
Relays........................................................................2
Relays Configuration................................................75
Remote Setpoint Permit...........................................95
Remote Setpoint Select ...........................................95
Remote Setpoint Source..........................................94
Repeat per minute....................................................96
Replacement Parts List..........................................194
RESET (Integral Time).............................................97
Reset 2.....................................................................97
Resetting Calibration Trim......................................159
Resetting ORP Offset.............................................153
Resetting Output 1 Offsets.....................................181
Resetting pH Offset................................................162
Resetting pH Offset and (Standardization) pH Slope
...........................................................................147
Resetting Pressure Offset or Bias Volts.................174
Resetting temperature offset..................................185
resume delay..........................................................102
Resume Dly Mins.....................................................30
Rinse Cycle Cnt .......................................................30
Rinse Mins ...............................................................30
RS422/RS485 Modbus RTU Slave Communications
Interface.................................................................6
Process Instrument Explorer Software.....................47
Process Variable Source....................................81, 93
Process Variable Values ..........................................24
Proportional (P)........................................................91
Proportional Band (PB) ............................................96
PTS OVERRANGE ................................................190
PTS UNDERRANGE..............................................190
Pulse Output ................................................75, 76, 79
PV Bias ....................................................................70
PV High....................................................93, 100, 102
PV Low.....................................................93, 100, 102
PV n INPUT OPEN ................................................189
PV n OVERRANGE ...............................................189
PV n UNDERRANGE.............................................189
PV Source..........................................................76, 77
PV Temperature.......................................................24
PV Type .................................................62, 64, 67, 70
S
Safety Compliance.....................................................7
Safety precaution .............................................16, 113
Salinity ppt................................................................71
Salinity Type.............................................................71
Sample Calibration.................................................163
Sample Calibration Method....................................166
Sample Method of Calibrating pH Electrodes........145
Sample Method of Calibrating Cation pH ...............160
Sample Tap Electrode Mounting Recommendations
...........................................................................226
Saturation.................................................................70
Sequencer Steps for Auto Cycle ........................32, 35
Serial port.................................................................49
Setpoint at Power up................................................94
Setpoint High Limit Value.........................................93
Setpoint Low Limit Value..........................................93
Setpoint Value..........................................................81
Setup Group Overview.............................................52
Shielded wiring for locations with interference........114
Signal Sources.........................................................57
Single Displays.........................................................25
Slew Time ................................................................73
242
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Slope adjustments..................................................138
Slope Overrange....................................................191
Slope Underrange..................................................191
Software version number .......................................107
Solu Temp Coeff ................................................63, 65
Solu Temp Comp .........................................63, 64, 69
Solution Temp Too High ........................................190
Solution Temp Too Low .........................................190
Solution Unstable...................................................191
Solution Unstable...................................................190
Source......................................................................73
SP High Limit ...........................................................93
SP Low Limit ............................................................93
SP Source....................................................81, 82, 85
Specific and Cation Conductivity Setup....................38
Specifications.............................................................5
Sqr Root...................................................................85
Square Root.............................................................85
Standard and solution temperature compensation.....3
Standard pH Buffer Values for Automatic Buffer
Terminal Designations for Durafet II Electrode with
Cap Adapter.......................................................126
Terminal Designations for Durafet II Electrode with
External Preamplifier..........................................125
Terminal Designations for Durafet III Electrode......118
Terminal Designations for Durafet III Electrode with
Cap Adapter.......................................................127
Terminal Designations for HPW7000 System 122, 123
Terminal Designations for Meredian Electrode with
External Preamplifier..........................................124
Terminal Designations for Meredian II Electrode ...120
Terminal Designations for Option Board ................133
Terminal Designations for ORP..............................121
Terminal Designations for Power, Analog Output, and
Relay Output ......................................................132
Time proportional output ..............................42, 75, 76
Time Proportional Output Relay...............................76
Tune Set 2 ...............................................................97
Two Input Display.....................................................25
Two-cell Applications..............................................209
Recognition ........................................................139
standardization.......................................................138
Starting/Stopping the Auto Cycle .............................31
Status Displays ........................................................41
Status Messages......................................................24
Switch.......................................................................89
Switch selections......................................................88
Symbol Definitions ....................................................iv
System Status Messages.......................................189
U
Unit Reset ..............................................................108
Unpacking ..................................................................9
Unpacking and Preparing.........................................10
Upper range limit defaults ........................................66
User interface.............................................................1
V
Variables..................................................................43
Voltage outputs ......................................................176
T
Tag Name ................................................................24
Tag Names ............................................................109
TDS conversion factor....................................154, 155
TDS Factor...............................................................68
TEMP n OVERRANGE ..........................................189
TEMP n UNDERRANGE........................................189
Temp Type.............................................62, 64, 68, 71
Temp Units.................................................63, 64, 109
Temperature Compensation.......................................6
Temperature Input Calibration................................183
Terminal Designations for Conductivity..................128
Terminal Designations for Dissolved Oxygen.........129
Terminal Designations for Durafet II Electrode.......119
W, X, Y, Z
Wall Mounting Dimensions.......................................14
Watertight corrosion-resistant case............................4
Web pages...............................................................49
Weight........................................................................7
Wire Len Feet...........................................................69
Wire Len Meters.......................................................69
Wire Length............................................................108
wire size .................................................................108
Wire Size AWG ........................................................69
Wire Size Sq mm .....................................................70
Wireless Interface ......................................................6
Wiring for immunity compliance ...............................16
Wiring terminals and board location .......................116
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
244
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
January 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
January 2009
UDA2182 Universal Dual Analyzer Product Manual
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sales and Service
For application assistance, current specifications, pricing, or name of the nearest Authorized Distributor, contact one
of the offices below.
ASIA PACIFIC
Malaysia
Bulgaria
Slovak Republic
AFRICA
Control Products
Honeywell Engineering
Sdn Bhd
Honeywell EOOD
Honeywell s.r.o.
Mediterranean & African
Distributors
Asia Pacific Headquarters
Phone: +(65) 6355-2828
Fax: +(65) 6445-3033
Phone: +(359) 2 40 20 900
FAX: +(359) 2 40 20 990
Phone: +421-2-58247 410
FAX: +421-2-58247 415
Phone: +(60-3) 7950-
4776
Fax: +(60-3) 7958-8922
Honeywell SpA
Phone: +39 (02) 250 10
604
Czech Republic
Spain
Honeywell S.A.
Phone: +34 (0)91313 61 00
FAX: +34 (0)91313 61 30
Honeywell spol. s.r.o.
Phone: +420 242 442 232
FAX: +420 242 442 131
FAX: +39 (02) 250 10 659
Asia Pacific Global
New Zealand
Honeywell Limited
Phone: +(64-9) 623-5052
Fax: +(64-9) 623-5060
Toll Free (0800) 202-088
Technical Support
South Africa (Republic
of)
and sub saharan
Honeywell Southern
Africa
Honeywell S.A. Pty. Ltd.
Phone: +27 11 6958000
FAX +27 118051504
Field Instruments
Phone: +65 6580 3156
Fax: +65 6445-3033
Denmark
Honeywell A/S
Phone: +(45) 39 55 55 55
FAX: +(45) 39 55 55 58
Sweden
Honeywell AB
Phone: +(46) 8 775 55 00
FAX: +(46) 8 775 56 00
Process Instruments
Phone: (603) 76950 4777
Fax: (603) 7958 8922
Philippines
Honeywell Systems
(Philippines) Inc.
Phone: +(63-2) 633-2830-
31/
Finland
Switzerland
Honeywell AG
Phone: +41 18552448
FAX: +(41) 1 855 24 45
Australia
Honeywell OY
Phone: +358 (0)20752
2753
Honeywell Limited
Phone: +(61) 7-3846 1255
FAX: +(61) 7-3840 6481
Toll Free 1300-36-39-36
Toll Free Fax:
NORTH AMERICA
Canada
636 1661-62
Fax: +(63-2) 638-4013
FAX: +358 (0) 20752 2751
Honeywell LTD
Turkey
Phone: 1-800-737-3360
FAX: 1-800-565-4130
Singapore
France
Honeywell SA
Phone: +33 (0)1 60198075
FAX: +33 (0)1 60198201
Honeywell Turkey A.S.
Phone: +90 216 578 71 00
FAX: +90 216 575 66 35
1300-36-04-70
Honeywell Pte Ltd.
Phone: +(65) 6580 3278
Fax: +(65) 6445-3033
USA
China – PRC - Beijing
Honeywell China Inc.
Phone: +(86-10) 8458-
3280
Honeywell Process
Solutions,
Ukraine
Honeywell
Tel: +380-44-201 44 74
Fax: +380-44-201-44-75
South Korea
Germany
Honeywell AG
Phone: +49 (69)8064-299
FAX: +49 (69)806497336
Phone: 1-800-343-0228
FAX: 1-717-771-8251
Email:sc-cp-
Honeywell Korea Co Ltd
Phone: +(822) 799 6315
Fax: +(822) 792 9015
Fax: +(86-10) 8458-4650
appssales@
honeywell.com
China – PRC - Shanghai
Honeywell China Inc.
Phone: (86-21) 5257-4568
Fax: (86-21) 6237-2826
United Kingdom
Honeywell Control Systems
Ltd.
Phone: +44 (0)1344
655251
FAX: +44 (0) 1344 655554
Thailand
Honeywell Systems
(Thailand) Ltd.
Phone: +(662) 693-3099
FAX: +(662) 693-3089
Hungary
Honeywell Kft.
Phone: +36-1-451 4300
FAX: +36-1-451 4343
LATIN AMERICA
Argentina
China – PRC - Chengdu
Honeywell China Inc.
Phone: +(86-28) 8678-
6348
Honeywell S.A.I.C.
Phone: +(54-11) 4383-
3637
Italy
Taiwan R.O.C.
Honeywell S.p.A.
Phone:+390292146307
FAX: +39 0292146377
MIDDLE EAST
FAX: +(54-11) 4325-6470
Honeywell Taiwan Ltd.
Phone: +(886-2) 2245-
1000
Fax: +(86-28) 8678-7061
Abu Dhabi U A E
Middle East Headquarters
Honeywell Middle East Ltd.
Phone: +971 2 4041246
FAX: +971 2 4432536
Brazil
China – PRC - Xi’an
Honeywell China Ltd -
Xi’an.
Phone: +(86-29) 8833-
7490
Fax: +(86-29) 8833-7489
Honeywell do Brasil & Cia
Phone: +(55-11) 7266-
1900
FAX: +(886-2) 2245-3241
The Netherlands
Honeywell B.V.
SE Asia Countries
see Honeywell Pte Ltd
(Singapore)
for: Pakistan, Cambodia,
Guam, Laos, Myanmar,
Vietnam, East Timor
Phone: +31 (0) 20
5656200
FAX: +(55-11) 7266-1905
Sultanate of Oman
Honeywell & Co Oman LLC
Phone: +968 24 701153/
Ext.33
FAX: +31 (0) 20 5656210
Chile
Honeywell Chile, S.A.
Phone: +(56-2) 233-0688
FAX: +(56-2) 231-6679
Norway
Honeywell A/S
Phone: (45) 39 55 55 55
China – PRC - Shenzhen-
Honeywell China Inc.
Phone: +(86) 755-2518-
1226
FAX +968 24 787351
SE Asia Countries
see Honeywell
Automation
Saudia Arabia
Honeywell Turki Arabia Ltd
Jubail Office
Phone: +966-3-341-0140
Fax: +966-3-341-0216
Honeywell - ATCO
Dammam Office
Phone: 0096638304584
Fax: 0096638338059
Mexico
Poland
Fax: +(86) 755-2518-1221
Honeywell S.A. de C.V.
Phone: +(52) 55 5259-
1966
Honeywell Sp. zo.o
Phone: +48-22-6060900
FAX: +48-22-6060901
India Ltd for:
Bangladesh
Nepal
Indonesia
PT Honeywell Indonesia
Phone: +(62) 21-535-8833
FAX: +(62) 21-5367 1008
FAX: +(52) 55 5570-2985
Sri Lanka
Portugal
Puerto Rico
Honeywell Inc.
Phone: +(809) 792-7075
FAX: +(809) 792-0053
Honeywell Portugal Lda
Phone: +351 21 424 5000
FAX: +351 21 424 50 99
EUROPE
India Automation India Ltd.
Honeywell Ltd.
Phone:+(91) 5603-9400
Fax: +(91) 5603-9600
Austria
Honeywell Austria GmbH
Phone: +43 (316)400123
FAX: +43 (316)40017
Kuwait
Romania
Honeywell Kuwait KSC
Phone: +965 242 1327 to
30
Trinidad
Honeywell Inc.
Phone: +(868) 624-3964
FAX: +(868) 624-3969
Honeywell Bucharest
Phone: +40 (0) 21
2316437
Japan
Honeywell Inc.
Phone: +(81) 3 6730 7150
Fax: +(81) 3 6730 7228
Belgium
Fax: +965 242 8315
And
Phone: +965 326
2934/1821Fax: +965 326
1714
FAX: +40 (0) 21 2316439
Honeywell SA/NV
Phone: +32 (0) 2 728 24
07
Venezuela
Honeywell CA
Phone: +(58-2) 238-0211
FAX: +(58-2) 238-3391
Russian Federation (RF),
ZAO "Honeywell"
Phone: +7 (095) 796 98 00
FAX: +7 (495) 797 99 64
FAX: +32 (0) 2 728 22 45
Honeywell Process Solutions
Honeywell
2500 W. Union Hill Drive
70-82-25-119 Rev.5
January 2009
Phoenix, Arizona 85027
©2009 Honeywell International Inc.
www.honeywell.com/ps
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|